Rockwell Automation PV300 Micro, PV300, PV550, PV600, PV900, PV1000, PV1400 PanelView terminal User Manual
Below you will find brief information for PanelView terminal PV300 Micro, PanelView terminal PV300, PanelView terminal PV550, PanelView terminal PV600, PanelView terminal PV900, PanelView terminal PV1000. These Rockwell Automation terminals can be used in a variety of machine control and monitoring applications, from simple to complex. They offer a wide range of features, including color displays, touch screens, keypads, and various communication ports.
Advertisement
Advertisement
PanelView Standard Operator
Terminals
User Manual
(Catalog Numbers
PV300 Micro, PV300,
PV550, PV600, PV900, PV1000, PV1400
)
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from your local
Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
IMPORTANT
ATTENTION
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence
SHOCK HAZARD
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last publication.
To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph.
Topic Page
Updated list of supported memory cards.
Added information on the proper placement of the sealing gasket.
Added information on airborne contaminants for the PanelView 300 terminal.
Added EU Battery Directive to the list of agency certifications.
Added information on battery replacement and disposal.
3 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 3
Summary of Changes
4 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Preface
Terminal Overview
5 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Table of Contents
Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installing PanelView Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
European Union Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Additional Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 1
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Intended Uses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Terminal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Color and Grayscale Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PanelView 300 Monochrome Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PanelView 300 Micro Monochrome Terminals . . . . . . . . . 18
PanelView 550 Monochrome Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PanelView 600 Color Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PanelView 900 Monochrome Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PanelView 900 Color Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PanelView 1000 Color Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
PanelView 1000 Grayscale Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PanelView 1400 Color Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Features (front) . . . . . . . . 26
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Features (back) . . . . . . . . 26
PanelView 300 Terminal Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
PanelView 300 Terminal Features (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
PanelView 300 Terminal Features (back). . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PanelView 550 Terminal Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PanelView 550 Terminal Features (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PanelView 550 Keypad or Keypad and Touch Screen
Terminals (back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
PanelView 550 Touch Screen Terminal Features (back) . . 32
PanelView 600 Terminal Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
PanelView 600 Terminal Features (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
PanelView 600 Keypad or Keypad & Touch Screen
Terminal (back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PanelView 600 Touch Screen Terminal Features (back) . . 38
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal Features (front) . . . . . . . . 40
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal Features (back) . . . . . . . . 42
PanelView 1400 Terminal Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PanelView 1400 Terminal Features (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PanelView 1400 Terminal Features (back and sides) . . . . 46
5
6
Table of Contents
Applying Power and Resetting
Terminal
Configuring the Terminal
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Configuration Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Function Key Legend Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Memory Cards and Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Antiglare Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DH-485 Operating and Programming Cables . . . . . . . . . . 53
PanelView File Transfer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power Supply and Link Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
RS-232 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Remote I/O or DH+ Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Backlight Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Real Time Clock Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Panel Mount Clips and Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Remote I/O Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Power Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter 2
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Wiring and Safety Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connect AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connect dc Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Reset the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Power-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
For DH-485 and RS-232 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
For Remote I/O Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter 3
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Access the Configuration Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Operations List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Reset Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Comm and Fault Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Table of Contents
Select a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Language List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Use a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Memory Card Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Disconnect Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Applications on Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Restore From Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Save to Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Erase/Format Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Configure Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DH-485 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DH+ Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Remote I/O Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ControlNet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DeviceNet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DF1 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
EtherNet/IP Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Configure Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Power-up with Presets or Last States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Restart Unit and Load Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Key Repeat Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Key Repeat Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Viewing Terminal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Font File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Adjust Screen Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . 90
PanelView 300 Terminal Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PanelView 550 Terminal Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PanelView 600/900/1000 Color Terminal Screen Setup . . 94
PanelView 900 Monochrome Terminal Screen Setup . . . . 95
PanelView 1000 Grayscale Terminal Screen Setup . . . . . . 97
PanelView 1400 Color Terminal Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . 98
Set the Time and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Set the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Set the Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
7
Table of Contents
8
Using a Memory Card
Running Applications
Set Up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Top of Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Chapter 4
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Supported Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Use the Memory Card Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Load Application from a Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Load Application on a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Store Font Files on a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Remove a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Chapter 5
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Important Information for PanelView 300 Micro Terminal
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Screen Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Push Button Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Active List Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Active Control List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
List Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cursor-piloted Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Numeric Entry Cursor Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Keypad Enable Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Scratchpad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ASCII Entry Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ASCII Scratchpad - Keypad or Keypad/Touch Screen
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ASCII Scratchpad - PV300 Micro/300 Terminals . . . . . . . 122
ASCII Scratchpad - PV550/600 Touch Screen Terminals . 123
ASCII Scratchpad - PV900/1000/1400 Touch Screen
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ASCII Scratchpads in Other Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Screen Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cursor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
List Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
List Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV300 Micro
Terminal
Installing the PV300 Terminal
Installing the PV550 Terminal
Table of Contents
Multistate Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Bar Graph Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Analog Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Numeric Data Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Message Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Time or Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter 6
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Install Terminal in Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 7
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Install the PV300 Terminal in a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 8
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
PV550 Keypad, Keypad & Touch Screen Terminals . . . . 147
PV550 Touch Screen Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PV550 Keypad, Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals . . 149
PV550 Touch Screen Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Install the PV550 Terminal in a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 9
Table of Contents
Installing the PV600 Terminal
Installing the PV900/1000
Terminals
Installing the PV1400 Terminal
10
Chapter 9
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PV600 Keypad, Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals . . 155
PV600 Touch Screen Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
PV600 Keypad, Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals . . 156
PV600 Touch Screen Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PV600 Keypad and Keypad and Touch Screen
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PV600 Touch Screen Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Install the PV600 in a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Chapter 10
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
PV900 Terminals Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
PV900 Touch Terminal Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . 163
PV900 Keypad Terminal Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . 163
PV1000 Terminals Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
PV1000 Touch Terminal Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . 164
PV1000 Keypad Terminal Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . 164
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
PV900 Panel Cutout Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
PV1000 Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Install the PV900/PV1000 Terminals in a Panel . . . . . . . . . . 167
Chapter 11
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
PV1400 Touch Terminal Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . 170
PV1400 Keypad Terminal Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . 170
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
PV1400 Keypad Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
PV1400 Touch Screen Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Table of Contents
Install the PV1400 Terminal in a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Mount Terminal with Mounting Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 12
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Wiring and Safety Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cable Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Runtime Communication Cables - to Processors . . . . . . 178
Runtime Communication Cables - to Network Interface
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Application File Upload/Download (Direct) Cables . . . . 184
Remote I/O Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Remote I/O Terminal Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Supported Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Making Remote I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Remote I/O Pass-through using DH+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
DH+ Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
DH+ Terminal Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Typical DH+ System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Making DH+ Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
DH-485 Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
DH-485 Terminal Ports (RJ45). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Connecting to a Single SLC Controller (Point-to-point). . 193
Connecting to a DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Connecting a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Connecting a Hand-held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
RS-232 (DH-485) Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
RS-232 Terminal Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Connecting to an SLC, CompactLogix, MicroLogix
Controller (Point-to-point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Connecting to a MicroLogix Controller through an
AIC+ Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Connecting a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Connecting a DH+ to DH-485 Pass-through Link . . . . . . 202
RS-232 (DF1) Terminal Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Compatible Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
RS-232 (DF1) Terminal Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
RS-232/DF1 Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Connecting to a MicroLogix 1000 Controller . . . . . . . . . 204
Connecting to an SLC, PLC, or MicroLogix 1500LRP
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Connecting to a CompactLogix or FlexLogix . . . . . . . . . 205
Using a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Connecting to a DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP Network . . . 206
Constructing a Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11
Table of Contents
ControlNet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ControlNet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Compatible ControlNet Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
ControlNet Terminal Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Typical ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Making ControlNet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
NAP and Redundant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
DeviceNet Network Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
DeviceNet Terminal Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Making DeviceNet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Typical DeviceNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
EtherNet/IP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
EtherNet/IP Terminal Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Ethernet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Typical EtherNet/IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
RS-232 Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Connecting to a MicroLogix Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Connecting to an SLC, PLC-5, ControlLogix, MicroLogix
1500LRP, CompactLogix, or FlexLogix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Connecting to an Advanced Interface Converter . . . . . . 220
Connecting to a DeviceNet Interface (DNI) . . . . . . . . . . 220
Connecting to a Personal Computer (Application File
Transfers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Connecting a Computer or Printer to the Terminal . . . . . . . 223
Chapter 13
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Use the Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Interpret Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Clean the Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Remove Paint and Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Equipment Hose-downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Replace the Clock Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Replace the Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Specifications
Appendix A
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
PanelView 300 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
PanelView 550 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
PanelView 600 Color Keypad and Touch Terminals . . . . . . 238
PanelView 600 Color Touch Only Terminals . . . . . . . . . . 239
12 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Table of Contents
Messages, Codes and Self-test
Numbers
European Union Directive
Compliance
PanelView 900 Monochrome and Color Terminals . . . . . . . 240
PanelView 1000 Color & Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
PanelView 1400 Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Agency Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Appendix B
Types of Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fault Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
General Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
DH-485 Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
ControlNet Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Remote I/O Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
EtherNet/IP Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
DH+ Terminal Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
DF1 Terminal Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Terminal Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
DeviceNet Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
General Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ControlNet Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
EtherNet/IP Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Remote I/O Communication Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Self-test Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Appendix C
EMC and Low Voltage Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Intended Use of Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Wiring Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Declarations of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Battery Replacement and Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Glossary
Index
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 13
Table of Contents
14 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Preface
Objectives
Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of this manual.
•
Intended audience
•
Conventions used
•
Terminology
•
Installing PanelView terminals
•
European Union Directive Compliance
•
Related publications
•
Technical support
Intended Audience
Conventions
Terminology
Installing PanelView
Terminals
No special knowledge is required to understand this manual or operate the PanelView terminals. Before running an application, you must know the functions of all screens and screen objects. This information is available from the application designer.
Equipment installers must be familiar with standard panel installation techniques.
The manual uses these conventions:
•
For specific PanelView terminals, PanelView is replaced with the
PV abbreviation. For example: PV1000 refers to the PanelView
1000 terminal.
•
PanelView terminal refers to any one of the PanelView terminals.
This manual contains some terms that may be unfamiliar.
Use the Glossary on page 273 of this manual for assistance.
Each terminal is shipped with installation instructions and a panel cutout. Please follow these instructions when installing your
PanelView terminal in a panel or enclosure.
European Union Directive
Compliance
Refer to Appendix C for details on installing the PanelView terminals
in industrial environments requiring compliance with European Union
Directives.
15 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 15
Preface
Additional Resources
Refer to the extensive online help for the PanelBuilder32 Software or the following publications if necessary.
Technical Support
Resource
PanelBuilder32 Software Getting Results
Manual, publication 2711-GR003
PanelBuilder32 Quick Start Manual, publication 2711-QS003
WinPFT File Transfer Utility, publication
2711-TD006
PROFIBUS DP Communication for
PanelView Terminals, publication 2711-6.3
Modbus Communication for PanelView
Terminals, publication 2711-6.9
Programmable Controller Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1
Data Highway/Data Highway Plus/Data
Highway-485 Cable Installation Manual, publication 1770-6.2.2
Description
Information about using PanelBuilder32 software
Information about starting PanelBuilder32 software
Information about the WinPFT file transfer utility
Information about PROFIBUS DP communication for PanelView terminals
Information about Modbus communication for PanelView terminals
Information on wiring and grounding
Information about installing Data
Highway/Data Highway Plus/Data
Highway-485 cable
For information relating to your controller, refer to the appropriate manual.
If you have questions about the PanelView terminals or the
PanelBuilder32 software, please refer to the online manuals or online help provided with the PanelBuilder32 installation CD. These publications are also available from the literature library at: http://literature.rockwellautomation.com
Frequently Asked Questions
Documents on frequently asked questions are available at: http://www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase
Software and Firmware Upgrades
To receive software updates (software serial number required) and firmware upgrades for your PanelView terminal:
• locate on PanelBuilder32 installation CD.
• call Rockwell Software at 1-440-646-7700 or fax 1-440-646-7701.
• access www.software.rockwell.com.
16 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
1
Terminal Overview
Chapter Objectives
Intended Uses
Terminal Types
17 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
This chapter gives an overview of the PanelView Operator Terminals.
•
Intended uses
•
Terminal types and features
•
Applications
•
Configuration mode
•
Terminal messages
•
Printing
•
Accessories and replacement parts
You can use the PanelView operator terminals for a wide variety of machine control and monitoring applications.
ATTENTION
Do not use a PanelView terminal for emergency stops or other controls critical to the safety of personnel or equipment. Use separate hardwired operator interface devices that do not depend on solid state electronics. See the inside front cover of this manual for guidelines.
PanelView terminals are available in a variety of options.
•
Display size and type (monochrome, grayscale, color)
•
Operator input (touch screen or keypad)
•
Communication port (DH-485, RS-232, remote I/O, DH+,
ControlNet, DeviceNet, Ethernet, EtherNet/IP, DF1)
•
RS-232 printer port support
In addition, some terminals are available with:
•
AC or DC power (L1 at the end of a catalog number indicates a
DC terminal, for example, 2711-B5A1L1, or -T9C1L1).
• stainless steel bezel available on PanelView 550 keypad or keypad & touch terminals.
Contact your Allen-Bradley representative for availability.
17
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
Color and Grayscale Terminals
Color terminals support a fixed palette of 32 standard EGA colors.
Grayscale terminals support a fixed palette of four colors (shades of gray). All color in an application is defined when the application is created. Colors are not selectable at the terminal.
PanelView 300 Monochrome Terminals
The PanelView 300 terminal is only available with 24V DC input power.
Operator
Input
Keypad
Communication Port
DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485)
DeviceNet RS-232
(DF1)
Printer Port
RS-232 x x x x x
Catalog
Number
2711-K3A2L1
2711-K3A5L1
2711-K3A10L1
2711-K3A17L1
PanelView 300 Micro Monochrome Terminals
The PanelView 300 Micro terminal is available only with 24V DC input power and does not have a printer port. The PV300 Micro terminal contains a single RS-232 communication port which supports either
DF1 or DH485 communication protocols as specified in the table below.
Operator
Input
Keypad
Communication Port
DH-485 DF1 x x
Catalog
Number
2711-M3A19L1
2711-M3A18L1
18 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
PanelView 550 Monochrome Terminals
The touch screen version of the PanelView 550 terminal is available only with 24V DC power. The L1 in the catalog number indicates DC power.
Operator
Input
Touch
Screen and
Keypad
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485) x x x x
DH+ x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Ethernet
Printer
Port
RS-232 x x
Keypad x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Touch
Screen
(24V DC only) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(1)
Add L1 to the end of the catalog number for 24V DC power.
Add L2 to the end of a catalog number for stainless steel. Not available for the touch screen terminals.
Add L3 to the end of a catalog number for 24V DC power and stainless steel. Stainless steel is not available for the touch screen terminals.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Catalog
Number
(1)
2711-B5A1
2711-B5A2
2711-B5A3
2711-B5A5
2711-B5A8
2711-B5A9
2711-B5A10
2711-B5A15
2711-B5A16
2711-B5A20
2711-K5A1
2711-K5A2
2711-K5A3
2711-K5A5
2711-K5A8
2711-K5A9
2711-K5A10
2711-K5A15
2711-K5A16
2711-K5A20
2711-T5A1L1
2711-T5A2L1
2711-T5A3L1
2711-T5A5L1
2711-T5A8L1
2711-T5A9L1
2711-T5A10L1
2711-T5A15L1
2711-T5A16L1
2711-T5A20L1
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 19
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 600 Color Terminals
Operator
Input
Touch
Screen and
Keypad
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485) x x x
DH+ x x x
Keypad
Touch
Screen
(24V DC only) x x x x x x x x x x x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Ethernet
Printer
Port
RS-232 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Catalog
Number
(1)
2711-K6C9
2711-K6C10
2711-K6C15
2711-K6C16
2711-K6C20
2711-T6C1L1
2711-T6C2L1
2711-T6C3L1
2711-T6C5L1
2711-T6C8L1
2711-T6C9L1
2711-T6C10L1
2711-T6C15L1
2711-T6C16L1
2711-T6C20L1
2711-B6C1
2711-B6C2
2711-B6C3
2711-B6C5
2711-B6C8
2711-B6C9
2711-B6C10
2711-B6C15
2711-B6C16
2711-B6C20
2711-K6C1
2711-K6C2
2711-K6C3
2711-K6C5
2711-K6C8
(1)
Add L1 to the end of the catalog number for 24V DC power.
20 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
PanelView 900 Monochrome Terminals
These terminals are no longer available for purchase.
Operator
Input
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485)
Touch Screen x x x x
DH+ x x
Keypad x x x x x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Printer Port
RS-232
Catalog Number
(1) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2711-T9A1
2711-T9A2
2711-T9A3
2711-T9A5
2711-T9A8
2711-T9A9
2711-T9A10
2711-T9A15
2711-T9A16
2711-K9A1
2711-K9A2
2711-K9A3
2711-K9A5
2711-K9A8
2711-K9A9
2711-K9A10
2711-K9A15
2711-K9A16
(1)
Add L1 to the end of the catalog number for 24V DC power.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 21
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 900 Color Terminals
These terminals are no longer available for purchase.
Operator
Input
Touch
Screen
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485) x x
DH+ x x
Keypad x x x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Ethernet x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Printer
Port
RS-232
Catalog
Number
(1)
2711-T9C1
2711-T9C3
2711-T9C8
2711-T9C9
2711-T9C10
2711-T9C15
2711-T9C16
2711-T9C20
2711-K9C1
2711-K9C3
2711-K9C8
2711-K9C9
2711-K9C10
2711-K9C15
2711-K9C16
2711-K9C20
(1)
Add L1 to the end of the catalog number for 24V DC power.
22 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
PanelView 1000 Color Terminals
Operator
Input
Touch
Screen
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485) x x
DH+ x x
Keypad x x x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Ethernet
Printer
Port
RS-232 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Catalog
Number
(1)
2711-T10C1
2711-T10C3
2711-T10C8
2711-T10C9
2711-T10C10
2711-T10C15
2711-T10C16
2711-T10C20
2711-K10C1
2711-K10C3
2711-K10C8
2711-K10C9
2711-K10C10
2711-K10C15
2711-K10C16
2711-K10C20
(1)
Add L1 to the end of the catalog number for 24V DC power.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 23
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 1000 Grayscale Terminals
Operator
Input
Touch
Screen
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485) x x
DH+ x x
Keypad x x x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Ethernet
Printer
Port
RS-232 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
(1)
Add L1 to the end of the catalog number for 24V DC power.
Catalog
Number
(1)
2711-T10G1
2711-T10G3
2711-T10G8
2711-T10G9
2711-T10G10
2711-T10G15
2711-T10G16
2711-T10G20
2711-K10G1
2711-K10G3
2711-K10G8
2711-K10G9
2711-K10G10
2711-K10G15
2711-K10G16
2711-K10G20
24 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
PanelView 1400 Color Terminals
These terminals are no longer available for purchase.
Operator
Input
Touch
Screen
Communication Port
RIO DH-485 RS-232
(DH-485) x x
DH+ x x
Keypad x x x x
DeviceNet ControlNet RS-232
(DF1)
Ethernet x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Printer
Port
RS-232
Catalog
Number
2711-T14C1
2711-T14C3
2711-T14C8
2711-T14C9
2711-T14C10
2711-T14C15
2711-T14C16
2711-T14C20
2711-K14C1
2711-K14C3
2711-K14C8
2711-K14C9
2711-K14C10
2711-K14C15
2711-K14C16
2711-K14C20
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 25
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 300 Micro
Terminal Features
This section defines features of the PanelView 300 Micro keypad terminal.
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Features (front)
4
2
1
2
3
#
1
2
3
4
Feature
Function keys
(F1…F4)
Cursor keys
Description
Use the function keys to initiate functions on the terminal display.
Keypad terminal display
Use the cursor keys (left, right, up, down) as programmed function keys in addition to the F1…F4 function keys or to move the cursor in displayed lists, to select a numeric entry object, to enter configuration mode, or to enter/modify numeric and ascii data.
Stores an entered value.
Liquid crystal display with integral backlight. Displays application text, controls, graphics.
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Features (back)
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
#
1
Feature
Power connection terminals
DF1 or DH-485 (RS232) communication port
Sealing gasket
Nameplate label
Description
Connects to a 24V DC (11-30V DC) external power source.
Connects to an SLC, PLC, or MicroLogix controller by using an RS-232 connection. Also used for downloading applications directly from a computer.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Provides product information.
26 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
PanelView 300 Terminal
Features
This section defines features of the PanelView 300 keypad terminal.
PanelView 300 Terminal Features (front)
5
4
1
2
3
#
1
2
Feature
Function keys (F1…F8)
Cursor keys
3 Numeric entry keys
Description
Use the function keys to initiate functions on the terminal display. These keys may have custom legends.
Use the up or down cursor keys to move the cursor up or down in a list or to increment/decrement values. Use the left or right cursor keys to select an object with an indicator bar, or to enter configuration mode.
0…9 - Enters numeric values.
. Enters a decimal point.
- Enters a negative value.
4
5
Keypad terminal display
OEM label option (series B and later)
↵
Stores an entered value.
Initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or OFF push button, by pressing the corresponding function key (F1...F8).
Contact Rockwell Automation or your authorized distributor for custom label information.
The following illustration shows the dimensions for the OEM label.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 27
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 300 Terminal Features (back)
DeviceNet with additional RS-232 Port
3
RS-232 (DH-485 or DF1) without additional RS-232 Port
4
5
10 12
DH-485 without RS-232 Port
2
1 6
9 or 11
8 7
7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
5
6
3
4
7
#
1
2
8
9
10
11
12
Feature
Nameplate label
Sealing gasket
COMM Status indicator (green)
FAULT Status indicator (red)
Memory card slot
Power connection terminals
DH-485 communication port
DH-485 programming connector
RS-232 (DH-485) communication port
DeviceNet connector
RS-232 (DF1) communication port
RS-232 Printer/File transfer port
Description
Provides product information.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Connects to an external 24V DC power source (18…32V DC).
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 controller for point-to-point DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC, or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port. This port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer.
Connects to a printer (K3A10L1 version only). On a DeviceNet terminal, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
28 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
2
3
4
5
PanelView 550 Terminal
Features
This section defines features of the PanelView 550 terminals.
PanelView 550 Terminal Features (front)
Keypad Terminal Keypad & Touch Screen Terminal
Cell 16
4 3
Cell 1
5
6
Cell 113 Cell 128
1 2
Touch Screen Terminal
Cell 1
Cell 16
5
6
Cell 113
Cell 128
#
1
6
Feature
Function Keys (F1…F10)
Cursor Keys
Numeric Entry Keys
Keypad Terminal Display
Touch Screen Terminal Display
Touch Cells (Touch Screen terminal)
Description
On keypad terminals, use the function keys to initiate functions on the terminal display. These keys may have custom legends.
On keypad and touch screen terminals, you can initiate functions by using the function keys and/or touch screen objects.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor in displayed lists, to select a numeric entry object, or to enter configuration mode.
0…9 - Enters numeric values.
. Enters a decimal point.
- Enters a negative value.
←
↵
Stores an entered value.
On keypad terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or
OFF push button, by pressing a function key (F1…F10).
On touch screen or keypad & touch screen terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or OFF push button, by touching the screen object.
Each interactive screen object occupies one or more of 128 cells.
On keypad and touch screen terminals, you can initiate functions by using the function keys and/or touch screen objects.
The 128 touch cells (16 columns x 8 rows) let you initiate functions by touching the screen. Interactive screen objects are aligned with touch cells when the application is created.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 29
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
3
2
PanelView 550 Keypad or Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals
(back)
DH-485 without additional RS-232 Port
4
5
6
1
AC connector shown, DC connector looks different
DH-485 with additional RS-232 Port
19 11
RS-232 (DH-485) without additional RS-232 Port
10
11 10
8
7
9
Backlight lamp behind access cover
Series G and earlier
Remote I/O, DF1, DH+, DeviceNet, ControlNet, Ethernet,
with additional RS-232 Port
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, or 18 19
19
12
RS-232 (DH-485) with additional RS-232 Port
12
30 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
5
6
3
4
7
8
#
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Feature
Power Connection Terminals
Nameplate Label
Sealing Gasket
COMM Status (Green) Indicator
FAULT Status (Red) Indicator
Memory Card Slot
Access Cover
Backlight Lamp
Spare Bulb Holder
DH-485 Communication Port
DH-485 Programming Connector
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
Remote I/O Port
DH+ Communication Port
DeviceNet Connector
ControlNet Connector
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 Printer/ File Transfer Port
Description
Connects to external power source.
Provides product information.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Provides access to the replaceable backlight lamp.
Light source for the display backlight. Light transmits through a fiber-optic bundle to the back of the LCD display.
(1)
Stores a spare backlight lamp.
(1)
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 controller for point-to-point DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a scanner or sub-scanner on a remote I/O network.
Connects to a PLC-5, SLC 5/04, or ControlLogix controller on a DH+ link.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a ControlLogix controller (with 1756-CNB module) or PLC-5 on a
ControlNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC, or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port.
Connects to a PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller, or a ControlLogix, MicroLogix, FlexLogix, or CompactLogix controller (with appropriate bridge module) on an EtherNet/IP network.
Connects to a printer.
On remote I/O, DH+, DF1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, or ControlNet terminals, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
The RS-232 port on the DH-485 or RS-232 (DH-485) terminal is used to connect a printer but not for file transfers.
(1)
Series H and later PanelView 550 Keypad and Keypad Touch Terminals have an integrated LED backlight. This backlight is non-replaceable.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 31
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 550 Touch Screen Terminal Features (back)
DH-485 without additional RS-232 Port
5
4
3
2
6
7
1
DH-485 with RS-232 Port
11
10 9
8
Backlight lamp behind access cover
Series A only
9
11 10
19
RS-232 (DH-485) without additional RS-232 Port
Remote I/O, DF1, DH+, DeviceNet,
ControlNet, Ethernet, with RS-232 Port
12
RS-232 (DH-485) with additional RS-232 Port
19
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, or 18
12 19
32 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
5
6
3
4
7
8
#
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Feature
Power Connection Terminals
Sealing Gasket
FAULT Status (Red) Indicator
COMM Status (Green) Indicator
Nameplate Label
Memory Card Slot
Reset Button
Access Cover
Backlight Lamp
DH-485 Communication Port
DH-485 Programming Connector
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
Remote I/O Port
DH+ Communication Port
DeviceNet Connector
ControlNet Connector
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 Printer/File Transfer Port
Description
Connects to external DC power source.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Provides product information.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Resets the terminal.
Provides access to the replaceable backlight lamp.
(1)
Light source for the display backlight.
(1)
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 for point-to-point
DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link
Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a scanner or sub-scanner on a remote I/O network.
Connects to a PLC-5, SLC 5/04, or ControlLogix controller on a DH+ link.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a ControlLogix controller (with 1756-CNB module) or PLC-5 on a
ControlNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC, or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port.
Connects to a PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller, or a ControlLogix, MicroLogix, FlexLogix or CompactLogix (with appropriate bridge module) on an EtherNet/IP network.
Connects to a printer.
On remote I/O, DH+, DF1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, or ControlNet terminals, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
The RS-232 port on the DH-485 or RS-232 (DH-485) terminal is used to connect a printer but not for file transfers.
(1)
Series B and later PanelView 550 Touch Terminals have an integrated LED backlight. This backlight is non-replaceable.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 33
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 600 Terminal
Features
This section defines features of the PanelView 600 terminals.
PanelView 600 Terminal Features (front)
Keypad Terminal
3
4
Cell 1
5
6
Cell 113
Cell 1
5
6
Cell 113
1
2
Keypad & Touch Screen Terminal
Touch Screen Terminal
Cell 16
Cell 128
Cell 16
Cell 128
34 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
Feature
Function Keys (F1…F10)
Cursor Keys
Numeric Entry Keys
Keypad Terminal Display
Touch Screen Terminal Display
Touch Cells (Touch Screen terminal)
Description
Use the function keys on keypad terminals to initiate functions on the terminal display. These keys may have custom legends.
On the keypad & touch screen terminals, you can initiate functions by using the function keys and/or touch screen objects.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor in displayed lists, to select a numeric entry object, or to enter configuration mode.
0…9 - Enters numeric values.
. Enters a decimal point.
- Enters a negative value.
←
Clears entered digits or cancels the scratchpad.
↵
Stores an entered value.
On keypad terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or
OFF push button, by pressing a function key (F1...F10).
On keypad and touch screen terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or OFF push button, by touching the screen object. Each interactive screen object occupies one or more of 128 cells.
On touch screen and keypad terminals, you can initiate functions, by using the function keys and/or touch screen objects.
The 128 touch cells (16 columns x 8 rows) let you initiate functions by touching the screen. Interactive screen objects are aligned with touch cells when the application is created.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 35
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 600 Keypad or Keypad & Touch Screen Terminal
(back)
Remote I/O, DF1, DH+, DeviceNet, ControlNet, or Ethernet with additional RS-232 Port
4
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 16
DH-485 without additional RS-232 Port
3
2
7 8
DH-485 with additional RS-232 Port
1
7, 8, 9, 10
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
6
5
16 7 8
RS-232 (DH-485) without additional RS-232 Port
RS-232 (DH-485) with additional RS-232 Port
16 9
9
36 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
5
6
3
4
7
#
1
2
8
9
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
Feature
Power Connection Terminals
Nameplate Label
Memory Card Slot
Sealing Gasket
FAULT Status (Red) Indicator
COMM Status (Green) Indicator
DH-485 Communication Port
DH-485 Programming Connector
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
Remote I/O Port
DH+ Communication Port
DeviceNet Connector
ControlNet Connector
(RS-232) DF1 Communication Port
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 Printer/File Transfer Port
Description
Connects to external power source.
Provides product information.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 for point-to-point
DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link
Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a scanner or sub-scanner on a remote I/O network.
Connects to a PLC-5, SLC 5/04, or ControlLogix controller on a DH+ link.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a ControlLogix controller (with 1756-CNB module) or PLC-5 on a
ControlNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC, or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port.
Connects to a PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller, or a ControlLogix, MicroLogix, FlexLogix, or CompactLogix (with appropriate bridge module) on an EtherNet/IP network.
Connects to a printer.
On remote I/O, DH+, DF1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, or ControlNet terminals, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
The RS-232 port on the DH-485 or RS-232 (DH-485) terminal is used to connect a printer but not for file transfers.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 37
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 600 Touch Screen Terminal Features (back)
Remote I/O, DF1, DH+, DeviceNet, ControlNet, or Ethernet with additional RS-232 Port
5
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, or 16
17
DH-485 without additional RS-232 Port
2
4
3
1
8 9
DH-485 with additional RS-232 Port
8, 9, 10, 11
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 7
6
17 8
9
RS-232 (DH-485) without additional RS-232 Port
10
RS-232 (DH-485) with additional RS-232 Port
17 10
38 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
5
6
3
4
7
8
#
1
2
9
10
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
Feature
Power Connection Terminals
Nameplate Label
Fault Status (Red)
COMM Status (Green)
Sealing Gasket
Reset Button
Memory Card Slot
DH-485 Communication Port
DH-485 Programming Connector
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
Remote I/O Port
DH+ Communication Port
DeviceNet Connector
ControlNet Connector
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 Printer/File Transfer Port
Description
Connects to external power source.
Provides product information.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Resets the terminal.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 for point-to-point
DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link
Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a scanner or sub-scanner on a remote I/O network.
Connects to a PLC-5, SLC 5/04, or ControlLogix controller on a DH+ link.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a ControlLogix controller (with 1756-CNB module) or PLC-5 on a
ControlNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC, or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port.
Connects to a PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller, or a ControlLogix, MicroLogix, FlexLogix, or CompactLogix (with appropriate bridge module) on an EtherNet/IP network.
Connects to a printer.
On remote I/O, DH+, DF1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, or ControlNet terminals, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
The RS-232 port on the DH-485 or RS-232 (DH-485) terminal is used to connect a printer but not for file transfers.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 39
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 900/1000
Terminal Features
This section defines features of the PanelView 900 and 1000 terminals.
IMPORTANT
PanelView 900 terminals are no longer available. Contact your local sales office or authorized Rockwell Automation Distributor for suitable substitutes.
4
1
Keypad Terminal
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal Features (front)
Touch Screen Terminal
Cell 1
3
5
6
Cell 361
2
Cell 24
Cell 384
40 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
2
3
#
1
4
5
6
Feature
Function Keys (F1…F16)
Cursor Keys
Numeric Entry Keys
Description
Use the function keys on keypad terminals to initiate functions on the terminal display. These keys may have custom legends.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor in displayed lists, to select a numeric entry object or to enter configuration mode.
0…9 - Enters numeric values.
. Enters a decimal point.
- Enters a negative value.
Keypad Terminal Display
Touch Screen Terminal Display
Touch Cells (Touch Screen terminal)
↵
Stores an entered value.
On keypad terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or
OFF push button, by pressing a function key (F1…F16).
On touch screen terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an
ON or OFF push button, by touching the screen object. Each interactive screen object occupies one or more of 384 cells.
The 384 touch cells (24 columns x 16 rows) let you initiate functions by touching the screen. Interactive screen objects are aligned with touch cells when the application is created.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 41
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal Features (back)
Remote I/O, DF1, DH+, DeviceNet, Ethernet, or ControlNet with additional RS-232 Port
4
Back View
Touch Screen Terminal
3
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, or 16 17
2
DH-485 Version without additional RS-232 Port
5
6
8 9
DH-485 with additional RS-232 Port
1
8, 9, 10
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
7
4
Back View
Keypad Terminal
17 8 9
RS-232 (DH-485) without additional RS-232 Port
3
6
5
10
2
RS-232 (DH-485) with additional RS-232 Port
1
8, 9, 10
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
7
17 10
42 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
5
6
3
4
7
8
#
1
2
9
10
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
Feature
Power Connection Terminals
Nameplate Label
Reset Button
Sealing Gasket
Memory Card Slot
FAULT Status (Red) Indicator
COMM Status (Green) Indicator
DH-485 Communication Port
DH-485 Programming Connector
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
Remote I/O Port
DH+ Communication Port
DeviceNet Connector
ControlNet Connector
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 Printer/File Transfer Port
Description
Connects to external power source.
Provides product information.
Resets the terminal.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 for point-to-point
DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link
Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a scanner or sub-scanner on a remote I/O network.
Connects to a PLC-5, SLC 5/04, or ControlLogix controller on a DH+ link.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a ControlLogix controller (with 1756-CNB module) or PLC-5 on a
ControlNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC, or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port.
Connects to a PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller, or a ControlLogix, MicroLogix, FlexLogix, or CompactLogix (with appropriate bridge module) on an EtherNet/IP network.
Connects to a printer.
On remote I/O, DH+, DF1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, or ControlNet terminals, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
The RS-232 port on the DH-485 or RS-232 (DH-485) terminal is used to connect a printer but not for file transfers.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 43
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 1400 Terminal
Features
This section defines features of the PanelView 1400 terminals.
IMPORTANT
PanelView 1400 terminals are no longer available. Contact your local sales office or authorized Rockwell Automation Distributor for suitable substitutes.
4
Keypad Terminal
PanelView 1400 Terminal Features (front)
Touch Screen Terminal
Cell 1
3
5
6
Cell 24
Cell 384
Cell 361
2
1
44 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
4
5
6
2
3
#
1
Feature
Function Keys (F1…F21)
Cursor Keys
Numeric Entry Keys
Keypad Terminal Display
Touch Screen Terminal Display
Touch Cells (Touch Screen terminal)
Description
Use the function keys on keypad terminals to initiate functions on the terminal display. These keys may have custom legends.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor in displayed lists, to select a numeric entry object, or to enter configuration mode.
0…9 - Enters numeric values.
. Enters a decimal point.
- Enters a negative value.
←
↵
Stores an entered value.
On keypad terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an ON or
OFF push button, by pressing a function key (F1…F21).
On touch screen terminals, initiate the function of a displayed object, such as an
ON or OFF push button, by touching the screen object. Each interactive screen object occupies one or more of 384 cells.
The 384 touch cells (24 columns x 16 rows) let you initiate functions by touching the screen. Interactive screen objects are aligned with touch cells when the application is created.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 45
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
PanelView 1400 Terminal Features (back and sides)
Remote I/O, DF1, DH+, DeviceNet, ControlNet, or Ethernet with additional RS-232 Port
19
18
17
16
7, 8, 9
10, 11, 12
13, 14, 15, 16
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15
6
DH-485 with additional RS-232 Port 5
Left Side
4 3
7
8
16
20
2
1
RS-232 (DH-485) with additional RS-232 Port
9
16
Right Side
21
46 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
6
7
4
5
2
3
#
1
8
9
17
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
Feature
Brightness Control
Contrast Control
Nameplate Label
FAULT Status (Red)
COMM Status (Green)
Power Connection Terminals
DH-485 Communication Port
DH-485 Programming Connector
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
Remote I/O Port
DH+ Communication Port
DeviceNet Connector
ControlNet Connector
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 Printer/File Transfer Port
Memory Card Eject Button
Memory Card Slot
Sealing Gasket
Reset Button
CRT Board Adjustments
Description
Adjusts the brightness of the color display.
Adjusts the contrast of the color display.
Provides product information.
Indicates firmware or hardware faults.
Indicates when communication is occurring.
Connects to external power source.
Connects to an SLC or MicroLogix controller, DH-485 network, or Wallmount Power
Supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1).
Connects to a Personal Computer Interface Converter (Cat. No. 1747-PIC) for transferring applications. Also connects to an SLC programmer, such as the
Hand-held Terminal (Cat. No. 1747-PT1).
Connects to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 for point-to-point
DH-485 communication. Connects to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+ Link
Coupler. Also connects to the RS-232 serial port of a computer for transferring applications.
Connects to a scanner or sub-scanner on a remote I/O network.
Connects to a PLC-5, SLC 5/04, or ControlLogix controller on a DH+ link.
Connects to a DeviceNet network.
Connects to a ControlLogix controller (with 1756-CNB module) or PLC-5 on a
ControlNet network.
Connects to a PLC, SLC or MicroLogix controller with a DF1 port.
Connects to a PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller, or a ControlLogix, MicroLogix, FlexLogix, or CompactLogix (with appropriate bridge module) on an EtherNet/IP network.
Connects to a printer. On remote I/O, DH+, DF1, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, or
ControlNet terminals, this port also connects to the RS-232 port of a computer for transferring applications.
The RS-232 port on the DH-485 or RS-232 (DH-485) terminal is used to connect a printer but not for file transfers.
Ejects memory card from slot.
Accepts a memory card which stores applications.
Seals the front of the terminal to an enclosure or panel.
Resets the terminal.
See the warning below.
ATTENTION
Only qualified service technicians should access the CRT board adjustments. Failure to follow this caution could result in electrical shock, a misadjusted monitor, or a damaged monitor.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 47
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
Applications
PanelView terminals operate with custom designed applications. The first time you power on the terminal, (no application file loaded), the terminal displays the Configuration Mode menu.
Chapter 3 describes the terminal functions you can configure from this
menu.
TIP
Remote I/O terminals provide an out-of-box application for setting remote I/O communication parameters.
If an application is loaded, the terminal displays the application’s start-up screen.
48
TIP
The application designer is responsible for documenting the operation of the application and selecting a startup screen.
How the terminal operates depends on the application and the type of terminal (touch screen or keypad).
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
Touch Screen Operation
Applications for touch screen terminals are controlled by touching screen objects.
Keypad Operation
Applications for keypad terminals are controlled by pressing function keys that correspond to screen objects. Data is entered manually by using the numeric entry keys.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
A function key legend kit is available for each terminal (except the
PV300 Micro terminal) to create custom labels for the function keys.
See the accessories at the end of this chapter.
ATTENTION
Do not press multiple touch screen objects or multiple function keys at the same time. This may result in unintended operation.
49
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
IMPORTANT
The keypad is designed for finger or gloved finger operation.
The touch screen may be operated with a finger, gloved finger, or with a touch screen plastic stylus device with a minimum tip radius of 1 mm (0.040 in) to prevent damage to the touch screen. Using any other object or tool may damage the keypad or touch screen.
Configuration Mode Menu
You can configure terminal functions from the Configuration Mode menu. These functions include how to:
• select a language.
• upload/download applications with a memory card.
• set or display serial communication parameters.
• select preset values.
• obtain terminal and application information.
• adjust screen parameters.
• set time and date.
• set printer parameters (for terminals with an RS-232 printer port).
• return to run mode.
Chapter 3 describes how to enter configuration mode and operations
you can perform by using the Configuration Mode menu.
Terminal Messages
Terminal messages display:
• status of an operation.
• minor faults, errors, or numeric entry mistakes.
• operator prompts.
Appendix B describes terminal messages and provides a list of
recommended actions.
50 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Printing
Alarm List
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
PanelView terminals equipped with an RS-232 printer port can print:
• triggered messages in a message display.
• triggered states of a multistate indicator.
• alarm messages.
• alarm lists.
Print attributes for objects are defined in the application.
Any printer that supports the IBM enhanced character set can be connected to the RS-232 printer port of a PanelView terminal.
PanelView terminals support an Alarm List queue to store information on triggered alarms. The Alarm List stores a maximum of 100 alarms or as many as the terminal can hold in nonvolatile RAM. The number of alarms stored in the list is configured by using the PanelBuilder32 software.
The Alarm List stores the following data for each alarm:
•
Acknowledge indicator
•
Alarm date and time
•
Acknowledge date and time
•
Alarm trigger value
•
Alarm text including variables
The Alarm List is cleared:
• when an application is downloaded to the terminal.
• when the terminal is reset or power is cycled.
The Alarm List object may appear on the Alarm Banner or other application screens. The data that displays in the Alarm List is configured using the PanelBuilder32 software.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 51
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
Accessories
This section lists the accessories available for the PanelView terminals.
Software
Cat. No.
300M 300 550 600 900 1000 1400 Description
2711-ND3 x x x x x x x Windows software required for creating
PanelView applications on a personal computer.
Cat. No.
2711-NF1
2711-NF2A
2711-NF2C
2711-NF4
2711-NF5
2711-NF6
2711-NF7
Function Key Legend Kits
300 550 600 900 1000 1400 Description x 5 legend inserts with key labels F1…F10 on one side. Use blank side to create custom labels.
x x
1 legend insert for PV900 keypad (monochrome) terminal with key labels F1…F16 on one side. Use blank side to create custom labels.
1 legend insert for PV900 keypad (color) terminal with key labels
F1…F16 on one side. Use blank side to create custom labels. x x x x
1 legend insert with key labels F1…F10 on one side. Use blank side to create custom labels.
2 legend inserts. One has key labels F1…F16; the other has key labels
F17…F21. Use blank sides to create custom labels.
1 legend insert with key labels F1…F16. Use blank side to create custom labels.
2 legend inserts with key labels F1…F4 and F5…F8. Use blank side to create custom labels.
52
Cat. No.
2711-NM11
(1)
2711-NM13
2711-NM14
2711-NM15
2711-NM216
(1)
2711-NM232
2711-NMCC
2711-NMCD
2711-NMCE x x x x x x x
Memory Cards and Retainer
300 550 600 900 1000 1400 Description x x x x x 256K memory card for storing applications.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2M flash memory card for storing applications.
4M flash memory card for storing applications.
10M flash memory card for storing applications.
16M flash ATA card for storing applications and font files.
32M flash ATA card for storing applications and font files.
Secures memory card in the PanelView 500/600 keypad or the
PanelView 900/1000 keypad and touch screen. Prevents electrostatic discharge.
Secures memory card in 550 touch screen terminal and prevents electrostatic discharge.
Secures memory card in PanelView 300 keypad and 600 touch screen terminals and prevents electrostatic discharge.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
Cat. No.
1747-PIC
1747-C10
1747-C11
1747-C20
1747-CP3
1761-CBL-AP00
1761-CBL-AC00
1761-CBL-AS03
1761-CBL-AS09
1761-CBL-AM00
1761-CBL-HM02
2711-CBL-HM05
2711-CBL-HM10
1761-CBL-PM00
(1)
Contact Rockwell Automation for availability.
Antiglare Overlay
Self-adhesive filters minimize the reflection of terminal displays.
Cat. No.
2711-NV4 (Keypad)
2711-NV4T (Touch Screen Terminals)
2711-NV3K (Keypad)
2711-NV3T (Touch Screen Terminals)
2711-NV5 (Keypad)
2711-NV7K (Keypad Terminals)
2711-NV7T (Touch Screen Terminals)
2711-NV6K (Keypad Terminals)
2711-NV6T (Touch Screen Terminals)
2711-NV8 (Keypad Terminals)
300M 300 550 600 900 1000 1400 x x x x x x x x x x x
DH-485 Operating and Programming Cables
Description
Personal Computer Interface Converter converts RS-232 signals to/from RS-485 signals. Use to transfer applications between a DH-485 terminal and a computer.
1.83 m (6 ft) cable connects a DH-485 terminal to an SLC or DH-485 network.
0.30 m (1 ft) cable connects a DH-485 terminal to an SLC or DH-485 network.
6.1 m (20 ft) cable connects a DH-485 terminal to an SLC or DH-485 network.
45 cm (17.7 in.) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to an AIC+ (Port1) through a null modem adapter.
45 cm (17.7 in.) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to an AIC+ (Port2) through a null modem adapter.
3 m (9.8 ft) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to an AIC+ (Port1) through a null modem adapter.
3 m (9.8 ft) cable connects a DH-485 terminal to an AIC+ (Port3).
9.9 m (29.5 ft) cable connects a DH-485 terminal to an AIC+ (Port3).
45 cm (17.7 in.) cable with 2 mini DIN, right angle connectors.
2 m (6.5 ft) cable with 2 mini DIN, right angle connectors.
5 m runtime cable with 2 mini DIN, right angle connectors.
10 m runtime cable with 2 mini DIN, right angle connectors.
45 cm (17.7 in.) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to an AIC+ (Port2) through a null modem adapter.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 53
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
Cat. No.
1761-CBL-PM02
2711-CBL-PM05
2711-CBL-PM10
Description
2 m (6.5 ft) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to an AIC+ (Port2) through a null modem adapter.
5 m programming cable with a D-shell and mini DIN connector.
10 m programming cable with a D-shell and mini DIN connector.
PanelView File Transfer Utility
Cat. No.
Description
2711-ND7 Transfers .PVA files between a PanelView terminal and a computer running Windows.
Power Supply and Link Couplers
The following items are available for all PanelView terminals.
Cat. No.
1747-NP1
1747-AIC
1761-NET-AIC
1761-NET-DNI
1761-NET-ENI
Description
Wallmount power supply provides power for DH-485 communication when an SLC controller or network is not connected.
AIC Link Coupler links devices on a DH-485 network.
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter links devices on a DH-485 network including MicroLogix.
DeviceNet Interface links DF1 PanelViews on a DeviceNet network.
Ethernet Interface links DF1 or Ethernet devices on an EtherNet/IP network.
54 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
RS-232 Cables
Cat. No.
2711-NC13
2711-NC14
2711-NC21
Description
5 m (15 ft) connects an RS-232 terminal to the Channel 0 port of an
SLC 5/03 controller or the RS-232 port of a computer or printer.
10 m (32 ft) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5/03 controller or the RS-232 port of a computer or printer.
5 m (15 ft) connects an RS-232 terminal to a MicroLogix controller
(except PV300 Micro).
2711-NC22
2706-NC13
15 m (49 ft) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to a MicroLogix controller (except PV300 Micro).
3 m (10 ft) cable connects an RS-232 terminal to an SLC 5/03 controller or the RS-232 port of a computer or printer.
1761-CBL-AP00 0.5 m (1.5 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to an SLC or PLC.
1761-CBL-PM02 2 m (6.5 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to an SLC or PLC.
2711-CBL-PM05 5 m (15 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to a ControlLogix, AIC+, SLC controller, or computer RS-232 port.
2711-CBL-PM10 10 m (30 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to a ControlLogix, AIC+, SLC controller, or computer RS-232 port.
1761-CBL-AMOO 0.5 m (1.5 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to a MicroLogix.
1761-CBL-HM02 2 m (6.5 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to a MicroLogix.
2711-CBL-HM05 5 m (15 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to a MicroLogix 1000/1200/1500, DeviceNet DNI, or AIC+ module.
2711-CBL-HM10 10 m (30 ft) cable connects a PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 terminal to a MicroLogix 1000/1200/1500, DeviceNet DNI, or AIC+ module.
Remote I/O or DH+ Cable
Cat. No.
1770-CD
Description
Shielded, 3-conductor cable (Belden 9463) for connecting a remote
I/O terminal to a remote I/O network.
55
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
Replacement Parts
This section lists the replacement parts available for the PanelView terminals.
Backlight Lamps
Cat. No.
2711-NL1
2711-NL2
2711-NL3
2711-NL4
2711-NL5
2711-NL6
2711-NL7
2711-NL9
2711-NL10
550 600 900 1000 Description x x
Halogen backlight lamp for all PV550 terminals. Provides backlighting for
LCD display.
Backlight for PV900 color terminal.
x x x x x x x
Backlight for PV600 color terminal.
Backlight for PV1000 color terminal.
Backlight for PV 600 (Series C only)
Backlight for PV1000 color terminal
(Series B only)
Backlight for PV1000 color terminal
(Series C only)
Backlight for PV1000 color terminal
(Series D and Series E only)
Backlight for PV1000 grayscale terminal (Series C and Series D only)
Backlight for PV1000 color terminal
(Series F only)
Backlight for PV1000 grayscale terminal (Series E only)
Real Time Clock Modules
Cat. No.
2711-NB2
2711-NB3
2711-NB4
300 550 600 900 1000 1400 Description x Real time clock module for PV550
(Series D or earlier). Does not apply to the PV550 touch screen terminals.
Contains lithium battery.
x x x x x x x x x
Real time clock module for PV600,
PV900, PV1000, PV1400 or PV550
(Series E and F). Does not apply to
PV550/PV600 touch screen terminals.
Contains lithium battery.
Real time clock module for PV300,
PV550 (Series G and later),
PV550/PV600 touch screen, PV600
(Series C and later), PV1000 color
(Series D and later), and PV1000 grayscale (Series B and later) terminals. Contains lithium battery.
56 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Overview Chapter 1
Panel Mount Clips and Studs
Cat. No.
2711-NP1
2711-NP2
2711-NP3
600 900 1000 1400 Description x 10 panel mount clips for PV1400 terminal.
x x x x
6 panel mount clips for PV600, PV900 or PV1000 terminals.
Optional panel mount studs (18) for
PV1400 terminals.
Remote I/O Connector
Cat. No.
550 600 900 1000 1400 Description
22112-046-03 x x x x x Terminal block connector plugs into remote I/O port of remote I/O terminals.
Power Input Connector
Cat. No.
2711-TBDC
300M x
600 (touch only) x
Description
Removable dc power input connectors for PanelView 300
Micro (qty. of 10).
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 57
Chapter 1 Terminal Overview
58 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter Objectives
Wiring and Safety
Guidelines
Chapter
2
Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
This chapter provides information on:
• wiring and safety guidelines.
• connecting AC or DC power.
• resetting the terminal.
• power-up sequence.
Use publication NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces when wiring the PanelView terminals. In addition to the NFPA general guidelines:
• connect the terminal to its own branch circuit.
• the input power should be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker rated at no more than 15 Amps.
• route incoming power to the PanelView terminal by a separate path from the communication cable.
IMPORTANT
Do not run signal wiring and power wiring in the same conduit.
• where power and communication lines must cross, they should cross at right angles. Communication lines can be installed in the same conduit as low level DC I/O lines (less than 10V).
59 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 59
Chapter 2 Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
Hazardous Location
Considerations
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III; or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Class
II, Class III Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b), 502-4(b),
503-3(b) as appropriate.
See the nameplate on terminal for hazardous locations certifications.
ATTENTION
In Class I, Class II, Class III Division 2 Hazardous locations, the PanelView terminal must be wired per the National
Electric Code as it applies to hazardous locations. Peripheral equipment must also be suitable for the location in which it is installed.
60 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Connect AC Power
Applying Power and Resetting Terminal Chapter 2
Below are AC electrical ratings for the PanelView terminals. The
PV550/PV600 touch screen only terminal is available only with DC power, not AC power.
Terminal Type Supply Voltage
PV550
PV600
PV900M/PV900C
PV1000G/PV1000C
PV1400
85…264V AC, 47…63 Hz
85…264V AC, 43…63 Hz
85…264V AC, 47…63 Hz
85…264V AC, 47…63 Hz
85…264V AC, 43…63 Hz
Power Consumption,
Max
45 VA
60 VA
110 VA
55 VA
200 VA
ATTENTION
Do not apply power to the PanelView terminal until all wiring connections have been made. Failure to do so may result in electrical shock.
The PanelView terminals are IEC 1131-2 Equipment Class I devices and require you to connect the GND (Ground) or (Protective
Earth) terminal to an earth conductor.
IMPORTANT
The PanelView terminals are designed for safe use when installed in a NEMA Type 12, 13, 4X (indoor use only), IP54 or
IP65 rated enclosure.
Follow these steps to connect power to the AC versions of the
PanelView.
1. Secure AC power wires to the L1 and L2N terminal block screws.
2. Secure the Earth Ground/Protective Earth wire to the GND or the screw on the terminal block.
ATTENTION
Improper wiring of the power terminals may result in voltage at the communication connector shells.
See the appropriate wiring diagram on page 62.
3. Apply power to the terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 61
Chapter 2 Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
PanelView 550 Terminal
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal
Black (Line)
White (Neutral)
Green (Earth Ground)
120/240V AC, 3 Wire,
U.S. Color Code
L1 L2N GND
120/240V AC, 3 Wire,
European Harmonized Color Code
L1 L2N GND
Brown (Line)
To Power Source
Blue (Neutral)
Green/Yellow
(Protective Earth)
To Power Source
PanelView 1400 Terminal
Power Terminal
Block (fixed)
120/240V AC, 3 Wire,
U.S. Color Code
L1 L2N GND/PE
120/240V AC, 3 Wire,
European Harmonized Color Code
L1 L2N GND/PE
Black (Line)
White (Neutral)
Green (Earth Ground)
Brown (Line)
Blue (Neutral)
Green/Yellow (Protective Earth)
To Power Source
To Power Source
62
Power Terminal (Fixed)
120/240V AC, 3 Wire,
GND/PE
U.S. Color Code
L2/N
L1/L
120/240V AC, 3 Wire,
European Harmonized Color Code
GND/PE
L2/N
Green (Earth Ground)
White (Neutral)
Black (Line)
L1/L
Green/Yellow (Protective Earth)
Blue (Neutral)
Brown (Line)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Connect DC Power
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Applying Power and Resetting Terminal Chapter 2
The L1 versions (Cat. No. 2711-K5 A5 A18...32V1L1, 2711-T9C1L1) of the PV300, PV300 Micro, PV550, PV600, PV900, and PV1000 terminals connect to a 24V DC power source.
The table below shows the electrical ratings for the DC versions of the terminals. Electronic circuitry and an internal fuse protect the terminals from reverse polarity and over-voltage conditions.
Terminal Type
PV300 Micro
PV300
PV550
PV550 (touch only)
PV600
PV600 (touch only)
PV900M
PV900C
PV1000G
PV1000C
Supply Voltage
(24V DC nominal)
11...30V DC
18...32V DC
18...30V DC
18...32V DC
18...32V DC
18...32V DC
18...30V DC
18...32V DC
18...32V DC
18...32V DC
Power Consumption, Max
2.5 W (0.105 A @ 24V DC)
6 W (0.25 A @ 24V DC)
18 W (0.75 A @ 24V DC)
18 W (0.75 A @ 24V DC)
24 W (1.0 A @ 24V DC)
24 W (1.0 A @ 24V DC)
58 W (2.5 A @ 24V DC)
50 W (2.1 A @ 24V DC)
24 W (1.0 A @ 24V DC)
24 W (1.0 A @ 24V DC)
ATTENTION
Do not connect a DC rated PanelView terminal to an AC power source. Connecting to an AC power source may damage the terminal.
IMPORTANT
The PanelView terminals are designed for use when installed in a NEMA Type 12, 13, NEMA 4X (indoor use only), IP54 or IP65 rated enclosure.
ATTENTION
Do not power PanelView terminals from the I/O power on a controller or from DeviceNet network power. If you try to do this, the PanelView will not power up and the DeviceNet or controller power supply may be over-stressed.
ATTENTION
Use only a safety extra-low voltage (SELV) power supply as a source for the PanelView 300 Micro, PanelView 300 or 550 touch screen terminal. A SELV power supply does not exceed
42.4V DC.
63
Chapter 2 Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
Connect the power source to the terminal at the 3-screw terminal block (PV300 Micro removable and PV600 Touch only, all others fixed).
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,
Class II, Class III, Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b).
64 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
PanelView 300 Terminal
Applying Power and Resetting Terminal Chapter 2
Follow these steps to connect power to the dc versions of the
PanelView.
1. Secure the DC power wires to the terminal block screws.
PanelView 550/600 Terminal
PanelView 900/1000 Terminal
Power Terminal
Block (fixed)
Note: In the PanelView 300, the Earth Ground and DC Negative wires are internally connected.
+
-
Earth Ground
DC Negative
DC Positive
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal
Power Terminal
Block (fixed)
Remove Terminal Block
Insert tip of screw driver here.
Press terminal block base in first with block leaning outward
Install Terminal Block
Push top back to vertical position to lock-in.
DC Positive
DC Negative
Functional Earth Ground
Use #16 to #22 AWG Solid Wire or
#18 to #22 AWG Stranded Wire.
2. Secure the Functional Earth Ground (FE) wire to the correct terminal block screw.
The dc negative and Functional Earth Ground wires are internally connected in the PanelView 300 Micro terminal.
3. Apply 24V DC power to the terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 65
Chapter 2 Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
Reset the Terminal
Resetting the terminal re-initializes the PanelView terminal (same as cycling power).
Follow these steps to reset the PV300, PV300 Micro, PV550 (keypad, keypad and touch) or the PV600 (keypad, keypad and touch) terminals.
•
Simultaneously press the Left arrow , Right arrow , and Enter
↵
keys. The terminal performs its powerup sequence.
The sequence in which keys are pressed (while running an application), determines what appears after the reset.
•
If you press the Left and Right arrow keys before the Enter
↵
key, the Configuration Mode menu appears.
•
If you press the Enter
↵
key before the arrow keys, the terminal runs the loaded application.
TIP
If the Left or Right arrow keys on the PanelView 300
Micro are assigned as function keys, you must use the GoTo
Configuration Screen button.
Follow these steps to reset the PV550 and PV600 (touch only)/
PV900/PV1000/PV1400 terminals.
1. Use a narrow, non-conductive tool to press the reset button.
The terminal performs its powerup sequence.
ATTENTION
Use a nonconducting object to press the Reset button. Do not use a conducting object such as a paper clip that may damage the terminal. Do not use the tip of a pencil; graphite may damage the terminal. The normally-open, momentarily-closed Reset button is designed for only 1.3 N
(0.29 lb) operating force. Use of excessive force may damage the button or cause it to stick.
PanelView 1400 PanelView 900/1000
66
Reset Button
On the PV550/PV600 touch screen terminals, the Reset button is on the right, below the Memory Card slot.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Power-up Sequence
Applying Power and Resetting Terminal Chapter 2
When resetting or applying power to a PanelView terminal, the terminal runs a series of self-tests. The initial display shows copyright information and the status of each self-test number.
See Appendix B for a description of the self-test numbers.
COPYRIGHT ALLEN-BRADLEY COMPANY
1999, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED VXX.XX
TESTING VERIFICANADO PRUFEN
VERIFICATION AUTOTEST
2
Self-test Number
For DH-485 and RS-232 Terminals
•
If an application is loaded, the terminal displays either the screen that was present prior to reset or power down, or the startup screen.
•
If an application is not loaded, the Configuration Mode menu appears.
PV900 Keypad Terminal
Note: On PV550/600 terminals, the Reset Video is F9.
On PV300 and PV300 Micro terminals, the Reset Video is F2.
Function keys do not appear on touch screen terminals.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 67
Chapter 2 Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
For Remote I/O Terminals
An out-of-box application screen opens allowing you to set remote
I/O parameters for the terminal. This screen is only available for initial setup. Once an application is downloaded, the remote I/O setup screen is erased.
The table on the next page defines the remote I/O Parameters.
PV550 Terminal
0
PV900 Keypad Terminal
68 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Applying Power and Resetting Terminal Chapter 2
F5
F6
Press this function key on
550/600 900/1000/1400
F1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
To set this RIO parameter
Description Options
Rack # Rack address of terminal on RIO network.
0…76
On PV550/600: Press
↵
to open the scratchpad. Enter the rack address and press
↵
again.
On PV900/PV1000/PV1400: Press F1 to set the rack #, then use the up and down arrow keys to select an address.
Rack Size Rack size of terminal. Each key press displays a different size. The terminal occupies a single rack.
Starting Module Group Starting module group number of the terminal in the assigned rack. Each key press displays a different module group.
Pass-through Enabled Enables or Disables Pass-through, which lets you transfer applications between a computer on a DH+ link and a terminal on a remote I/O link. A PLC-5 controller passes data between the networks.
Last Chassis Specifies whether the terminal occupies the last module group in the assigned rack (applies only to PLC2 controllers).
Block Transfer Timeout Timeout value for block transfers. Each key press toggles a value.
Baud Rate Communication rate at which the terminal will communicate on the RIO network.
1/4, 1/2, 3/4, Full
0,1 2,3 4,5 6,7
Yes or No
Yes or No
0…60 seconds
(0 is the default)
BaudMax. Cable Length
57.6K 10,000 ft
115.2K 5,000 ft
230.4K 2,500 ft
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 69
Chapter 2 Applying Power and Resetting Terminal
70 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
3
Configuring the Terminal
Chapter Objectives
Application Settings
This chapter shows how to use the Configuration Mode menu to configure terminal settings and perform operations including how to:
• access the Configuration Mode menu.
• select a language.
• use a memory card.
• configure communication (DH485, DH+, remote I/O,
ControlNet, DeviceNet, DF1, EtherNet/IP).
• configure presets.
• view terminal information.
• set the time and date.
• adjust display parameters.
• set up the printer.
Configuration parameters are set from the terminal or from the
PanelBuilder32 software when creating the application. Settings downloaded with the application have priority over terminal settings if the following option is enabled in the Terminal Setup dialog of the
PanelBuilder32 software.
x Use Downloaded configuration settings
In addition, the application may allow the controller to change the following while the application is running:
• time and date
• current display screen
• piloted control lists
71 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 71
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Access the Configuration
Mode Menu
The Configuration Mode menu appears on powerup if an application is not loaded or if the menu was last displayed prior to a reset or power down.
To access Configuration Mode on keypad terminals if an application is running, simultaneously press the Left and Right arrow keys on the terminal keypad.
TIP
If the Left or Right arrow keys on the PanelView 300
Micro are assigned as function keys, you must use the GoTo
Config. Screen button.
To access Configuration Mode on touch screen terminals:
• press the GoTo Config. Screen button on application screen or
• press the filled box in the lower right corner of the screen during powerup.
TIP
Most of the screens in this chapter are for the PanelView 900 keypad terminal. The screens for other terminals are similar. On keypad terminals you press terminal function keys to modify settings. These keys may differ between terminals depending on the screen size and function key placement. On touch screen terminals, you press the screen field or button.
72
Scrolling
List
PV300/PV300 Micro Keypad Terminal
Function keys do not appear on touch screen terminals.
On PV550/600 terminals, the Reset Video button is F9. On PanelView
300, 300 Micro terminals, the Reset Video button is F2.
Operations List
Select an operation using the Up or Down arrow keys. Press the
Enter
↵
key (keypad terminals) or press (touch screen terminals) to enter the selection.
Language
Displays the language menu.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Select a Language
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Run Mode
Runs the loaded application.
Reset Video
Resets the video to default settings. The reset video function is useful if the screen is set to non-viewable settings.
Comm and Fault Status Indicators
The two status indicators on the Configuration Mode menu indicate the operating state of the terminal. The operating states vary for each communication protocol (and the PV300 Micro terminal).
Press the Language button, [F8] key, from the Configuration Mode menu to display the Language Selection screen.
TIP
On PV300 and PV300 Micro terminals, scroll down on the main configuration menu to select a language.
Choisir Français
Deutsches Meün auswãhlen
Scagliere Italiano
Escoger Español
Select English
FIN
EXIT
USCITA
SALIR
EXIT
The terminal supports five languages.
•
French
•
German
•
Italian
•
Spanish
•
English
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 73
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Use a Memory Card
74
Language List
Select a language using the up or down arrow keys. All configuration screens and terminal messages will be displayed in the selected language.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Select Memory Card from the Configuration Mode menu to transfer applications between a memory card and the terminal. The PanelView
300 Micro does not support a memory card. Chapter 4 describes the
transfer procedure.
Valid Card Inserted
APPLICATIONS ON CARD
\*.PVA
############
F1
F8
F2 Restore from Card
F3 Save to Card
F4 Erase / Format Card
Memory
Card
Listing
Disconnect
Card
EXIT
F16
Memory Card Listing
Displays the file names of applications on the memory card. Only 1 file name is displayed at a time. Press the Memory Card Listing button or [F1] to scroll through the file names. This button does not display the names of font files (*.OTF).
Disconnect Card
Closes all files on the memory card. Press Disconnect before removing the card from the slot to ensure all files are closed. A message appears when you can remove the card from the card slot. Failure to follow this procedure could damage the card.
Applications on Card
Displays the selected application file stored on the memory card.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Restore From Card
Transfers the application under Applications on Card to the terminal.
Any application in the terminal is overwritten.
Save to Card
Saves the current application in the terminal to the memory card.
Erase/Format Card
Erases and formats a 2711-NM11, -12, -13, -14, 15 memory card. This function deletes all applications on the card. You can’t delete individual files. Don’t perform this operation on a 2711-NM2xx ATA card or the card will be inoperable.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Configure Communication
Select Communication Setup from the Configuration Mode menu to display or change the communication settings for your PanelView terminal. The screen that appears depends on the communication protocol of the terminal.
DH-485 Communication
The DH-485 screen lets you modify or display DH-485 settings for either a DH-485 or RS-232 PanelView terminal. These are the default settings.
•
Max Node Address = 31
•
Node Address = 2
•
Communication Rate = 19200
IMPORTANT
Settings downloaded with a DH-485 application take priority over terminal settings and take effect immediately after the download.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 75
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
76
Max Node:
Node:
Baud:
DH-485
31
2
19200
F1
F2
F3
Comm
LED
Fault
LED
EXIT
F16
Max Node
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad. Enter the highest node number on the network (up to 31) and press the Enter
↵
key. (On touch screen terminals, press the
↵
key on the scratchpad). A change to the maximum node address takes effect immediately.
Node
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad. Enter the node address of the terminal (0…31) and press the Enter
↵
key. (On touch screen terminals, press the ø key on the scratchpad). If you enter a value greater than the maximum node address, the value is accepted and the maximum node address is updated. A node address change takes effect immediately.
Baud
Steps through the communication rates with each key press: 1200,
2400, 9600, and 19200. The selected communication rate takes effect immediately.
Comm Status Indicator
• solid fill - normal operating state
• blinking - no communication established
• no fill - hardware failure
Fault Status Indicator
• no fill - normal operating state
• blinking - hardware is functioning but an application is not loaded or the current application is corrupted.
• solid fill - hardware failure
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
DH+ Communication
The DH+ screen lets you display or modify communication settings for the DH+ version of the PanelView terminals.
IMPORTANT
Settings downloaded with a DH+ application take priority over terminal settings and take effect immediately after the download.
Node:
Baud:
DH+
2
57.6 K
F1
F2
Comm
LED
Fault
LED
EXIT
F16
Node
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad. Enter the node address (0…77 octal) of the terminal on the DH+ link and press the Enter
↵
key. (On touch screen terminals, press the Enter key on the scratchpad). A node change takes effect immediately.
Baud
Steps through the communication rates with each key press: 57.6K
(default), 115.2K, and 230.4K. The selected rate takes effect immediately. The maximum cable length is restricted at higher communication rates.
Comm Status Indicator
• solid fill - normal operating state
• blinking - no communication established
• no fill - hardware failure
Fault Status Indicator
• no fill - normal operating state
• blinking - hardware is functioning but an application is not loaded or the current application is corrupted.
• solid fill - hardware failure
77
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
78
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Remote I/O Communication
The remote I/O configuration screen lets you display communication settings for a remote I/O terminal. Remote I/O settings are configured with the out-of-box application provided with the terminal or from the
PanelBuilder32 software.
RIO Configuration
Rack Number:
Rack Size:
Starting Group:
Pass-Through Enabled:
Last Chassis:
Baud:
3
Full
0,1
Yes
Yes
115.2K
No PLC Communication
F3
EXIT
F16
Settings are read only, except for communication rate.
Rack Number (read only)
Displays the current rack number (0…76 octal) of the terminal.
Rack Size (read only)
Displays the current rack size (1/4, 1/2, 3/4, or Full) of the terminal.
Starting Group (read only)
Displays the starting module group of the terminal: 0,1 2,3 4,5 6,7
Pass-through Enabled (read only)
Enables/disables Pass-through which allows you to transfer applications between a computer on the Allen-Bradley DH+ network and a terminal on the remote I/O link. A PLC-5 controller passes data between the two networks.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Last Chassis (ready only)
Indicates whether the terminal occupies the last module group in its assigned rack.
Baud
Steps through the communication rates with each key press: 57.6K
(default), 115.2K, and 230.4K. The selected rate takes effect immediately. The maximum cable length is restricted at higher communication rates.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
ControlNet Communication
The ControlNet screen lets you display communication settings for a
ControlNet terminal. You are only allowed to change the Node
Address and Underscan Delay settings.
IMPORTANT
Settings downloaded with a ControlNet application take priority over terminal settings and take effect immediately after the download.
ControlNet
New Node Address F2: ##
Active Node Address:
Interscan Delay F3:
03
100 ms
Restart
Terminal
F1
FW Revision: ########
Channel
Status
Comms
Status
Channel B
Connected
Serial #: ########
EXIT
F16
79
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
80
New Node Address
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad. Enter the node address (01…99 decimal) of the terminal and press the Enter
↵ key. On touch screen terminals, press the
↵
key on the scratchpad. The initial default is 3.
The change takes effect after the terminal is reset. If you enter a value greater than the UMAX node address, the terminal will not go online with the network.
Active Node Address (read only)
Displays the current address of the PanelView terminal.
Underscan Delay
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad so you can change the Interscan
Delay. Enter the delay (100…1000 milliseconds in multiples of 100) and press the Enter key. On touch screen terminals, press the
↵
key on the scratchpad. The initial default is 100. A change takes effect immediately.
FW Revision (read only)
Shows the revision # of the firmware in the ControlNet terminal.
Serial Number (read only)
Displays a unique, 32-bit serial number for the PanelView terminal.
Comms Status
Displays the current status of the communication card. Connected appears when the PanelView is connected to the network and operating properly.
Channel Status
Displays a value indicating the current status of channel A and B. The definition of each status condition follows the table. If multiple status conditions apply, the highest priority condition is displayed.
Displayed
Value
119
118
117
116
Status
AB
7 7
6 7
5 7
4 7
86
85
84
Displayed
Value
87
Status
AB
7 5
6 5
5 5
4 5
54
53
52
Displayed
Value
55
Status
AB
7 3
6 3
5 3
4 3
22
21
20
Displayed
Value
23
Status
AB
7 1
6 1
5 1
4 1
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
98
97
96
102
101
100
99
Displayed
Value
115
114
113
112
103
6 6
5 6
4 6
3 6
2 6
1 6
0 6
Status
AB
3 7
2 7
1 7
0 7
7 6
66
65
64
70
69
68
67
82
81
80
71
Displayed
Value
83
6 4
5 4
4 4
3 4
2 4
1 4
0 4
Status
AB
3 5
2 5
1 5
0 5
7 4
34
33
32
38
37
36
35
50
49
48
39
Displayed
Value
51
6 2
5 2
4 2
3 2
2 2
1 2
0 2
Status
AB
3 3
2 3
1 3
0 3
7 2
2
1
0
4
3
6
5
18
17
16
7
Displayed
Value
19
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 0
Status
AB
3 1
2 1
1 1
0 1
7 0
3
2
1
0
6
5
4
Status
7
Indicates
Terminal failure. Contact Allen-Bradley for technical support.
Self test being performed. Wait for end of test.
Cable fault or lonely connection (such as disconnected cable, redundancy warning).
2
Incorrect node configuration. Check for duplicate nodes.
3
Incorrect network configuration (such as overflow/underflow if signaled by host, out-of-step).
Check for a node greater than UMAX.
4
5
Priority
1 (Highest)
Temporary network errors (such as bad MAC frame, screeners not programmed).
Channel ok.
Channel disabled.
6
7
8 (Lowest)
Restart Terminal
Resets the PanelView terminal. A new node address takes affect after a reset.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 81
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
DeviceNet Communication
The DeviceNet screen lets you display or modify communication settings for a DeviceNet terminal.
IMPORTANT
Settings downloaded with a DeviceNet application take priority over terminal settings and take effect immediately after the download.
DeviceNet
New Node Address F2:
Active Node Address:
New Baud F3:
Active Baud:
2
125K
125K
Bus-off Interrupt F4:
Interscan Delay F5:
Comms Firmware Revision:
Restart
Terminal
F1
Mod/Net LED:
Not Connected
Input Size:
Output Size:
Hold in Reset
500 ms
Serial Number:
0
0
EXIT
F16
Restart Terminal
Resets the terminal.
New Node Address
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad. Type the node address (0…63) of the PanelView on the DeviceNet link or enter 64 to use the address stored on the communication card, Program Mode PGM displayed.
Press the Enter
↵ key to store the address. On touch screen terminals, press the
↵ key on the scratchpad. A node change takes effect on reset. If 64 is entered, the node address can be set from the network using a DeviceNet network configuration tool.
Active Node Address (read only)
Displays the current network operating address of the PanelView terminal. The default is 63.
82 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
New Baud
Step through the communication rates with each key press: 125K
(default), 250K, 500K, AutoBaud, PGM. If you select AutoBaud, the terminal determines the communication rate on startup (provided there is sufficient network traffic). If you select PGM, the terminal uses the most recent communication rate stored on the communication card. The selected communication rate takes effect on reset. The maximum cable length is restricted at higher communication rates.
Active Baud (read only)
Displays the current communication rate of the PanelView terminal.
The new communication rate is displayed after a reset. If the communication rate was set to AutoBaud, active baud displays the rate set by the terminal. If the communication rate was set to PGM, the active baud displays the most recent communication rate stored on the communication card.
Bus-off Interrupt
Specifies what occurs when a CAN bus-off interrupt occurs on the
DeviceNet network. The PanelView is not allowed network access when Hold on Reset is selected and a Bus-off Interrupt occurs.
•
Hold in Reset: holds the PanelView and waits for a communication reset or a terminal reset.
•
Reset and Continue Communication: resets DeviceNet communication and re-establishes the communication link.
Interscan Delay
Opens the numeric entry scratchpad so you can change the delay between scans of the Explicit-Client tags. Enter a value of 0…65535 milliseconds and press the Enter
↵
key. (On touch screen terminals, press the
↵
key on the scratchpad.) The default is 500 milliseconds.
This time delay is inserted between each full scan of the
Explicit-Client tags in the current screen context. The value is initially set by the downloaded application but can be changed by an operator. The new value takes effect at the end of the current scan delay.
Explicit-client mode will generate low priority, network messaging at intervals less than 500 milliseconds.
83
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Input Size
Displays the number of words (0…64) sent by the PanelView in an
I/O message. The default value is 0, which indicates that no input data is exchanged with the scanner. This value is set by the downloaded application.
Output Size
Displays the number of words (0…64) received by the PanelView in an I/O message. The default value is 0, which indicates no output data is exchanged with the scanner. This value is set by the downloaded application.
Comm Status Indicator
• solid fill - normal operating state
• blinking - no communication established
• no fill - hardware failure
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
DF1 Communication
The DF1 screen lets you display or modify DF1/full duplex communication settings for a DF1 PanelView terminal.
IMPORTANT
Settings downloaded with a DF1 application have priority over terminal settings and take effect immediately after the download.
DF1 - Full Duplex
F1 Comms
F2 Baud
N/8/1
9600
F3 MORE F4 EXIT
Typical DF1 Setup Screens
F1
Communication
Parameters
No Parity
8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
DF1 - Full Duplex
F2
Baud Rate
9600
F4
Node
64
Comm
LED
Fault
LED
Connected
F3
Error
Detection
CRC
F5
Handshaking
OFF
EXIT
F16
84 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Communication Parameters
Sets the communication parameters for the DF1 port on the PanelView terminal. The settings must match the target device. Each key press toggles through the available combinations for:
•
Parity = None (default), Even or Odd
•
Data Bits = 8
•
Stop Bits = 1 (default) or 2
The DF1 port on the PLC-5 controllers allows a parity of Even or None parity with 8 Data Bits. For the SLC controllers, the parity is fixed at
None and uses CRC error detection.
Baud Rate
Steps through the communication rates for the DF1 communication port with each key press: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. The initial default is 9600.The communication rate must match the communication rate of the target device.
Error Detection
Specifies the type of error checking performed on data. The default is
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).
•
Block Check Character (BCC) - modulo-256 arithmetic sum of an array of data bytes used for medium-level data verification.
•
Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC) - calculated on an array of data bytes and used for high-level data verification.
Node
Specifies the node number (0…254 decimal) for DF1 network communication. For point-to-point communication with an SLC, PLC,
MicroLogix controller or a 1761-NET DNI module, the default node number of 64 is used.
When you press F4, the numeric entry scratchpad opens. Enter a node number and press the Enter
↵ key. (On touch screen terminals, press the
↵
key on the scratchpad.)
Handshaking
Specifies the type of handshaking used by the RS-232 port.
•
On (CTS/RTS enabled)
•
OFF (CTS/RTS disabled)
Press F5 or touch the box to select an option. The default is Off.
85
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Comm Status Indicator
• solid fill - normal operating state
• blinking - no communication established with logic controller
•
no fill - hardware failure
Fault Status Indicator
• no fill - normal operating state
• blinking - hardware is functioning but an application is not loaded or the current application is corrupted.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
EtherNet/IP Communication
The EtherNet/IP screen lets you display or modify some of the
EtherNet/IP communication settings for an Ethernet PanelView terminal.
Additional parameters (Gateway Address, DNS Server and Domain
Name, and Timeout values) are set in the Communication Setup dialog of the PanelBuilder32 software and downloaded with the application.
IMPORTANT
Settings downloaded with an EtherNet/IP application have priority over terminal settings and take effect immediately after the download.
EtherNet/IP
DHCP/BootP Enable: Enabled
IP Address: 131.200.55.30
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Restart
Terminal
F1
Interscan Delay F3: 100 ms
FW Revision: ######## Serial #: ########
Ethernet Address: ##:##:##:##:##:##:##
Comms
Status
Attached
EXIT
F16
86 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
DHCP/BootP Enable
DHCP/BootP Enable (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) automatically allocates network devices and configurations to newly attached devices on a TCP/IP network. When DHCP/BootP Enable is enabled, the PanelView terminal is automatically assigned an IP
Address and Subnet Mask. These fields will be read only. Select disable to manually enter an IP Address or Subnet Mask for the
PanelView terminal.
IMPORTANT
If DHCP/BootP is enabled in the downloaded application and then disabled on the terminal, the terminal will not have the necessary information (Gateway Address, IP address, Subnet
Mask) to connect to the network on a restart. The Gateway
Address cannot be entered at the terminal; you must configure this address in the Communication Setup dialog of
PanelBuilder32.
IP Address
A unique address identifying the PanelView node on the EtherNet/IP network. The IP address is formatted as four sets of decimal numbers with periods between them (10.0.0.1). The range of values for the first set of decimal numbers is 1…255, unless all fields are set to 0.0.0.0.
The range of values for the last three sets of decimal numbers is
0…255. The default value is 0.0.0.0. A change is not effective until you reset the terminal.
Subnet Mask
A 32-bit value forming the PanelView terminal’s subnet mask. This parameter interprets IP addresses when the network is divided into multiple networks. The subnet mask is formatted as four sets of decimal numbers with periods between them (255.255.255.1). The range of values for the first set of decimal numbers is 1…255. The range of values for the last three sets of decimal numbers is 0…255.
The value of 0.0.0.0 is not a valid subnet mask.
Interscan Delay
The length of time the PanelView terminal delays before re-reading data from the logic controller. Valid values range from 100…1,000 milliseconds. The default is 100. The terminal must be restarted for a new interscan delay value to be accepted.
87
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Configure Presets
88
Restart Terminal
Resets the terminal.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Select Preset Operations from the Configuration Mode menu to set the values of control objects after a reset or power cycle. You can set presets to:
• values provided by the PanelView application.
• last values entered from terminal prior to a reset or power down.
PRESET OPERATIONS
Power Up With:
Presets
Last States
F7
Key Repeat
Rate
1000 ms
F1
Restart Unit
And
Load Values
F15
Key Repeat
Delay
200 ms EXIT
F16
Power-up with Presets or Last States
Displays the current power-up selection. Use the up and down arrow keys on keypad terminals (or the up and down keys on touch screen terminals) to select an option. The selection takes effect the next time the terminal is powered on.
•
Select Presets to load initial values of control objects (into controller data tables) with values supplied by the application.
•
Select Last States to load initial values of control objects (into controller data tables) with values entered at the terminal prior to a terminal reset or power down.
Restart Unit and Load Values
Loads the values selected in the Power-up With list and resets the terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Viewing Terminal
Information
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Key Repeat Rate
Specifies the number of repeats that occur per second when a key is pressed and held. Steps through key repeat rates: 0 (disabled),
200 ms (5 times/s), 250 ms (4 times/s), 330 ms (3 times/sec),
500 ms (2 times/s), 1000 ms (1 time/s).
Key Repeat Delay
Specifies how long a key must be pressed before it is repeated. Steps through delay rates: 200 ms, 400 ms, 600 ms, 800 ms, 1000 ms,
1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Select Terminal Info from the Configuration Mode menu to display information about your terminal. This information may be needed when calling for technical support.
TERMINAL INFO
Boot: ############
Firmware: ############
Hardware:
#######################################
Filename:
Fontfile:
############
############
Bytes Used
Bytes Free
############
############
EXIT
F16
Boot
Displays the boot code revision.
Firmware
Displays the firmware revision.
Hardware
Displays the hardware configuration.
Keypad (CPS)
Touch Screen (TS)
Keypad and Touch Screen (TS CPS)
89
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Communication Port (P#.xxx, for example, P0.485 or P1.232)
Screen Size (SS5.5, SS6.0, SS9.0, SS10.0, SS14.0)
Filename
Displays the name of the active application file. If the application file exists but is invalid, the file name appears as ********.
•
Bytes Used displays the number of bytes used by the loaded application.
•
Bytes Free displays the number of bytes available.
Font File
Displays the name of the external font file used by the application.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Adjust Screen Parameters
Select Screen Setup from the Configuration Mode menu to adjust settings of the terminal display. Changes take effect immediately.
PanelView 300 Micro Terminal Screen Setup
The PanelView 300 Micro terminal backlight is always on and intensity is not adjustable.
SCREEN SETUP
F1 Contrast
F2 Mode
F3 MORE
6
Normal
F4 EXIT
SCREEN SAVER
F1 Mode
F2 Timeout
F3 MORE
Off
5 min.
F4 EXIT
SCREEN SETUP
F1 Reset Video
F3 MORE F4 EXIT
90 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Contrast
Increases or decreases the display contrast. The contrast settings range from 0…10.
Video Mode
Toggles between normal video (dark text/graphics on a light background) and reverse video (light text/graphics on a dark background). Changes take effect immediately.
Screen Saver Mode
Mode - Select Timed or Off screen saver. When Timed, the screen intensity is reduced if user input or a controller screen change is not received within the time specified in the Screen Saver Timeout
Timeout
Specifies when an inactive screen enters screen saver mode. The timeout is adjusted in steps with each key press: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, or
30 minutes.
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal (default settings). If the screen is set to a non-viewable setting, press the Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously to enter the configuration mode and enter screen setup to reset the screen settings.
PanelView 300 Terminal Screen Setup
SCREEN SETUP
F1 Contrast
F2 Mode
F3 Reset Video
6
Normal
F7 MORE F8 EXIT
SCREEN SAVER
F1 Mode
F2 Timeout
Off
10 min.
F7 MORE F8 EXIT
IMPORTANT
Certain settings may make viewing the screen difficult. Do not exit this screen until viewing adjustments are acceptable.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 91
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Contrast
Increases or decreases the display contrast. The contrast settings range from 0…10.
Video Mode
Toggles between normal video (dark text/graphics on a light background) and reverse video (light text/graphics on a dark background). Changes take effect immediately.
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal (default settings). The [F3] key is also active on the Configuration Mode menu. If the screen is set to a non-viewable setting, press the Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously. Then press [F3] to reset the screen.
Screen Saver Mode
Mode - Select Timed or Off screen saver. When Timed, the screen intensity is reduced if user input or a controller screen change is not received within the time specified in the Screen Saver Timeout
Timeout
Specifies when an inactive screen enters screen saver mode. The timeout is adjusted in steps with each key press: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, or
30 minutes.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
92 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
PanelView 550 Terminal Screen Setup
F2
Backlight
Off
SCREEN SETUP
F3
Contrast
10
F4
Video Mode
Reverse
F7
Backlight
Timeout
10 min.
F9
Reset
Video
EXIT
F10
IMPORTANT
Certain settings may make viewing the screen difficult. Do not exit this screen until viewing adjustments are acceptable.
Backlight
Turns the backlight On, Off or to Timed mode. When set to Timed, the Backlight Timeout value determines when the backlight is turned off.
Contrast
Increases or decreases the display contrast. The contrast settings range from 0…10.
Video Mode
Toggles between normal video (dark text/graphics on a light background) and reverse video (light text/graphics on a dark background). Changes take effect immediately.
Backlight Timeout
Specifies when the backlight turns off if user input or a controller screen change is not received. The timeout settings are 5, 10, 20, 25, or 30 minutes. The Backlight Timeout value is used when the
Backlight parameter is set to Timed.
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal (default settings). The reset video [F9] key is also active on the Configuration Mode menu. If the screen is set to a non-viewable setting, press the Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously. Then press [F9] to reset the screen.
93
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Screen
Saver
Off
SCREEN SETUP
Normal
Intensity
100
F1 F2
SCREEN SAVER
Timeout Intensity
10 min.
F9
0
F10
PV600/900/1000 color
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
PanelView 600/900/1000 Color Terminal Screen Setup
Reset
Video
F15
EXIT
F16
SCREEN SETUP
SCREEN SAVER
Timed
F1
Timeout
10 min.
F9
Intensity
0
F10
Contrast
14
F2
Reset
Video
F15 color palette adjusts with contrast
PV600 color touch-screen only
EXIT
F16
IMPORTANT
Certain settings may make viewing the screen difficult. Do not exit this screen until viewing adjustments are acceptable.
Normal Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display with each key press. PV600/1000 terminal settings are 10…100, in 10 step increments. PV900 terminal settings are 50…100, in 10 step increments.
Contrast (PV600 touch-screen terminal only)
Adjusts the contrast of the display with each key press. Valid settings are 1…32. The initial default is 14.
Screen Saver Mode
Sets the screen saver to Timed or Off. When Timed, the screen intensity is reduced if user input or a controller screen change is not received within the time specified in the Screen Saver Timeout box.
Screen Saver Timeout
Specifies when an inactive screen enters screen saver mode. The timeout is adjusted in steps with each key press: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, or
30 minutes.
94 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Screen Saver Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display during screen saver mode.
PV600/1000 settings are 0…100, in 10 step increments. PV600 touch-screen only settings are 0 or 100. PV900 settings are 0, and
50…100, in 10 step increments. It is recommended that you set the intensity to a value less than 100 to prolong the life of the backlight.
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal video (default settings). The reset video
[F9] and [F15] keys are active on the Configuration Mode menu. If the screen is non-viewable, press the left and right arrow keys simultaneously. Then press [F9] or [F15] to reset the screen.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
PanelView 900 Monochrome Terminal Screen Setup
Normal Intensity
80
F1
Video Mode
Normal
F2
Reset
Video
F15
SCREEN SETUP
SCREEN SAVER
Mode
Timed
F3
Timeout
10 min.
F4
Intensity
80
F5
SCREEN CONDITIONER
Mode
Disabled
F6
Hour
## :
F7
Minute
0#
F8
EXIT
F16
IMPORTANT
Certain settings may make viewing the screen difficult. Do not exit this screen until viewing adjustments are acceptable.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Normal Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display with each key press: 35, 40, 50, 60,
70, 80, 90, 100. A new setting takes effect immediately.
Video Mode
Toggles between normal video (light text/graphics on a dark background) and reverse video (dark text/graphics on a light background). The change takes effect immediately. Normal video is recommended.
95
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
96
Screen Saver Mode
Sets the screen saver to Timed or Off. When Timed, the screen intensity is reduced if user input or a controller screen change is not received within the time specified in the Screen Saver Timeout box.
Screen Saver Timeout
Specifies when an inactive screen enters screen saver mode. The timeout is adjusted in steps with each key press: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, or
30 minutes.
Screen Saver Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display during screen saver mode. The intensity is adjusted with each key press: 0, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,
100.
Screen Conditioner Mode
Enables or disables the screen conditioner. This parameter sets a daily schedule for conditioning the display of a PV900 monochrome terminal to prevent image burn-in.
The conditioning process takes approximately 30 minutes and will not start until the terminal is inactive and in screen saver mode. You can interrupt the screen saver or conditioner at any time by pressing a key or the touch screen. If the screen conditioner is interrupted, it will resume when the screen saver is reactivated.
If you do not use the conditioner, random pixels will illuminate around objects after a period of time (approximately one year).
Screen Conditioner Hour
Specifies the hour at which to start the screen conditioner. The numeric entry scratchpad opens. Enter a value between 0…23, then press the Enter
↵ key (on touch screen terminals, press the Enter key on the scratchpad).
Screen Conditioner Minute
Specifies the minute at which to start the screen conditioner. The numeric entry scratchpad opens. Enter a value between 0…59, then press the Enter
↵ key (on touch screen terminals, press the Enter key on the scratchpad).
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal video (default settings).
On keypad terminals, the reset video [F15] key is also active on the
Configuration Mode menu. If the screen is non-viewable, press the
Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously. Then press [F15] to reset the screen.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
PanelView 1000 Grayscale Terminal Screen Setup
Screen
Saver
Off
SCREEN SETUP
Video
Mode
Normal
F1 F2
SCREEN SAVER
Timeout Intensity
10 min.
0
F9 F10
Reset
Video
F15
EXIT
F16
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
IMPORTANT
Certain settings may make viewing the screen difficult. Do not exit this screen until viewing adjustments are acceptable.
Video Mode
Toggles between normal video (darker text/graphics on a light background) and reverse video (lighter text/graphics on a dark background). The change takes effect immediately. Normal video is recommended.
Screen Saver Mode
Sets the screen saver to Timed or Off. When Timed, the screen intensity is reduced if user input or a controller screen change is not received within the time specified in the Screen Saver Timeout box.
Screen Saver Timeout
Specifies when an inactive screen enters screen saver mode. The timeout is adjusted in 5 minute increments with each key press, from
5…30 minutes.
97
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
98
Screen Saver Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display during screen saver mode. Settings are 0 (lowest intensity) or 100 (highest intensity). 0 is recommended to prolong the display life.
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal video (default settings).
On keypad terminals, the reset video [F15] key is also active on the
Configuration Mode menu. If the screen is non-viewable, press the
Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously. Then press reset video
[F15] to reset the screen.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
PanelView 1400 Color Terminal Screen Setup
SCREEN
SAVER
Mode
Off
F1
Timeout
5 min.
F2
Intensity
100
F3
SCREEN SETUP
DEGAUSS
Auto
Enabled
F4
Hour Minute
## : 0#
F5 F6
Manual
Degauss
F7
Normal
Intensity
100
F8
Reset
Video
F15
ALIGN
TOUCH
GRID
EXIT
F16
Touch Screen only
IMPORTANT
Certain settings may make viewing the screen difficult. Do not exit this screen until viewing adjustments are acceptable.
Screen Saver Mode
Sets the screen saver to Timed or Off. When Timed, the screen intensity is reduced if user input or a controller screen change is not received within the time specified in the Screen Saver Timeout box.
Screen Saver Timeout
Specifies when an inactive screen enters screen saver mode. The timeout is adjusted in 5 minute increments with each key press, from
5…30 minutes.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Screen Saver Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display during screen saver mode. The intensity is adjusted with each key press: 0, 25, 50, 75, or 100.
Degauss Auto
Enables or disables automatic degaussing. The degauss process takes a few seconds and will not start until the terminal is inactive.
Automatic degaussing occurs at midnight unless you adjust the hour and time parameters.
Degauss Hour
Specifies the hour to start automatic degaussing. The numeric entry scratchpad opens. Enter a value between 0…23, then press the Enter
↵ key (on touch screen terminals, press the Enter key on the scratchpad).
Degauss Minute
Specifies the minute to start automatic degaussing. The numeric entry scratchpad opens. Enter a value between 0…59, then press the Enter
↵ key (on touch screen terminals, press the Enter key on the scratchpad).
Manual Degauss
Allows you to manually degauss the display. When you press [F7], the display is degaussed immediately.
Normal Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the display with each key press: 25, 50, 75, or
100. The new setting takes effect immediately.
Reset Video
Resets the display to normal video (default settings).
On keypad terminals, the reset video [F15] key is also active on the
Configuration Mode menu. If the screen is non-viewable, press the
Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously. Then press [F15] to reset the screen.
99
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Align Touch Grid - PV1400 Touch Screen Terminal only
Opens the touch alignment screen, which lets you realign the screen with the touch grid. This function is useful when the terminal is positioned at an angle and viewing the screen is difficult unless you realign the screen.
Set the Time and Date
EXIT
F16
Move the screen until it aligns with the touch cells. Alignment changes are permanent.
Press
Exit
To
Move the screen up one pixel.
Move the screen down one pixel.
Move the screen to the right two pixels.
Move the screen to the left two pixels.
Move the screen to its factory default position.
Exit the touch alignment screen and return to Screen Setup.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
Select Date/Time from the Configuration Mode menu to reset the date and/or time.
Year
####
DATE/TIME
Month
####
Day
####
F1
Hour
####
F9
M MM/DD/YYYY
F2
Minute
####
F3
Second
####
F10 F11
M HH:MM:SS PM
EXIT
F16
100 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Set the Time
Use screen buttons (touch screens) or function keys to set the time.
On PV300, PV300
Micro Terminals
Use the left and right cursor keys to select the time or date item you want to change.
Use the up and down cursor keys to adjust the selected date or time variable.
On PV550/PV600
Terminals Press
On
PV900/1000/1400
Terminals Press
To Set
Hour button [F9] key Current hour Hours button [F6]
Minute button [F7] Minute button [F10] Minutes
Second button [F8] Second button [F11] Seconds
The scratchpad opens to enter each setting. Use the terminal keypad to enter the values. Press
↵ after each entry. Changes take effect immediately.
Set the Date
Use screen buttons (touch screens) or function keys to set the date.
Press
Year button [F1] key
Month button [F2]
Day button [F3]
To
Set current year
Set month (1…12)
Set day (1…31)
The scratchpad opens to enter each setting. Use the terminal keypad to enter the values. Press
↵ after each entry. Changes take effect immediately.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
101
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
Set Up the Printer
Select Printer Setup from the Configuration Mode menu to set parameters for those terminals equipped with an RS-232 printer port.
Any printer that supports the IBM enhanced character set can be connected to the RS-232 printer port.
Handshaking
XON/XOFF
F1
Top Of
Form
F9
PRINTER SETUP
Communication Parameters
No Parity
8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
F2
Port Mode
Printing
Enabled
F10
Baud Rate
19200
F3
EXIT
F16
IMPORTANT
The PanelView 300 Micro terminal does not support printer functions.
Printer settings are maintained between power cycles.
Page format parameters for printing are defined in the Terminal Setup dialog of PanelBuilder32 software and downloaded with the application.
Handshaking
Specifies the type of handshaking used by the RS-232 port.
•
None (initial default)
•
Hardware
•
XON/XOFF
If you change the type of handshaking used, you must reset your
PanelView before the change takes effect.
Communication Parameters
Sets the communication parameters for the printer port. Each key press toggles through the available combinations for:
•
Parity (None, Even or Odd)
•
Data Bits (7 or 8)
•
Stop Bits (1 or 2)
102 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Configuring the Terminal Chapter 3
Baud Rate
Sets the communication rate of the printer port. The communication rate must match the communication rate of the printer. The communication rate is adjusted with each key press: 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, and 19200. The initial default is 9600.
Top of Form
Notifies the PanelView terminal the printer is at the top of a page.
Manually adjust the printer to the top of the page before pressing the
Top of Form button. The printer also uses the Perforation Skip Value
(if defined in the Printer Setup of the PanelBuilder32 software) when the Top of Form button is pressed.
On powerup, the terminal assumes the printer is at the top of a page.
We recommend that you also set the PanelView terminal to the top of the page so that the printer and PanelView are at the same starting point. Otherwise your printout may not start at the top of the page.
Port Mode
Enables or disables printing for the RS-232 port.
The RS-232 port on some terminals supports both printing and application transfers. If you disable printing, the port is used for application transfers.
Exit
Returns to the Configuration Mode menu.
103
Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal
104 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
4
Using a Memory Card
Chapter Objectives
This chapter describes:
• supported memory cards.
• using the memory card retainer.
• loading application from a memory card.
• loading application on a memory card.
• storing font files on a memory card.
• removing a memory card.
Supported Memory Cards
Memory cards are available to transfer application files to/from a
PanelView terminal with a memory card slot. The PanelView 300
Micro terminal does not support a memory card.
PanelView terminals running firmware 3.0 (or later) and computers with an ATA card drive support the following cards.
•
4M flash ATA card (Cat. No. 2711-NM24)
(1)
•
8M flash ATA card (Cat. No. 2711-NM28)
(1)
•
16M flash ATA card (Cat. No. 2711-NM216)
(1)
•
64M flash ATA card (Cat. No. 2711-NM232)
All PanelView terminals and computers with a DataBook TMB240 or
TMB250 card drive support these cards:
•
256K flash memory card (Cat. No. 2711-NM11)
(1)
•
1M flash memory card (Cat. No. 2711-NM12)
(1)
•
2M flash memory card (Cat. No. 2711-NM13)
(2)
•
4M flash memory card (Cat. No. 2711-NM14)
(2)
•
10M flash memory card (Cat. No. 2711-NM15)
(2)
(1)
No longer available.
(2)
Limited availability.
105 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 105
Chapter 4 Using a Memory Card
Use the Memory Card
Retainer
A memory card retainer (catalog no. 2711-NMCC, -NMCD, -NMCE) is shipped with all PanelView terminals, except the PV300 Micro terminal and the PV1400 terminal. It is required for:
•
UL508 installations.
• vibration/mechanical shock environments.
•
CE certified installations.
• installations where the application uses a font file on a memory card, and the card must remain in the terminal during operation.
The following illustration shows the memory card and the memory card retainer. The card loads in the back of the terminal with the key slot on top.
Memory Card and Memory Card Retainer
Key Slot
Memory Card
Retainer
TIP
Connector Slots
A-B logo on right side
Memory Card Slot
The back of the PanelView 900 terminal is shown above. The location of the card slot will vary between the different terminals.
106 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Using a Memory Card Chapter 4
The memory card retainer protects against:
• electrical shock from loose high voltage wires in an electrical enclosure per UL508.
ATTENTION
When permanently installing a memory card in an electrical enclosure, the memory card retainer must be used to avoid accidental contact of high voltage leads to metal surfaces on the card. Failure to use the retainer could result in physical injury or damage to the terminal.
• electrostatic discharge (ESD) up to 15KV.
ATTENTION
Without the memory card retainer installed, electrostatic discharge could reset or damage the
PanelView terminal.
• accidental removal or ejection of the memory card from the card slot.
ATTENTION
Accidental removal of an ATA flash card from the card slot could result in damage to the card.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 107
Chapter 4 Using a Memory Card
Load Application from a Memory Card
The procedure below shows how to load an application on a memory card into the PanelView terminal.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard - Do not install or remove memory card unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Follow these steps to load an application from a memory card.
1. Insert the memory card in the card slot of the terminal.
If the terminal does not have an application loaded, the
Configuration Mode menu appears. Skip step 2.
2. Open the Configuration Mode menu by simultaneously pressing the Left and Right arrows (on keypad terminals), or the
Goto Config. Screen button (on touch screen terminals).
Function keys do not appear on touch screen terminals.
3. Select Memory Card and press the Enter
↵ key.
108 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Using a Memory Card Chapter 4
4. Press Memory Card Listing, [F1] on keypad terminals, until the application file you want to load is displayed.
5. Press Restore From Card, [F2] on keypad terminals, to begin the transfer.
Because this operation overwrites the current application in the terminal, you are prompted to abort or continue.
Proceed with download?
F1 - Abort|
F2 - Continue
The terminal displays the status of the transfer.
In progress ...
6. When the transfer is complete, the PanelView terminal checks the validity of the application, resets and runs the application.
109
Chapter 4 Using a Memory Card
Load Application on a Memory Card
The steps below show how to load an application in the terminal onto a memory card.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard - Do not install or remove memory card unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Follow these steps to transfer an application to a memory card.
1. Insert the memory card into the card slot of the terminal.
2. Open the Configuration Mode menu by simultaneously pressing the Left and Right arrows (on keypad terminals), or the
Goto Config. Screen button (on touch screen terminals).
Function keys do not appear on touch screen terminals.
3. Select Memory Card and press the Enter
↵ key.
110
4. If necessary, press Erase/Format Card, [F4] key on keypad terminals, to format or erase a 2711-NM11, 2711-NM12,
2711-NM13, 2711-NM14, or 2711-NM15 memory card.
IMPORTANT
Do not perform this operation on a
2711-NM2xx ATA card (where xx is size in megabytes). The card becomes inoperable.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Using a Memory Card Chapter 4
Because this operation erases all data on the memory card, you are prompted to abort or continue.
Format erases entire card?
F1 - Abort
F2 - Continue
5. Press Save to Card, [F3] on keypad terminals, to transfer the application in the terminal to the card.
If the application already exists on the memory card, you are prompted to abort or continue.
The .PVA file exits:
F1 - Abort
F2 - Upload with new PVA file
The terminal displays the status of the transfer.
Store Font Files on a Memory Card
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
In progress...
When the transfer is complete, the application file name appears in the Applications on Card list.
6. Press Memory Card Listing, [F1] key on keypad terminals, to scroll through the list.
TIP
If you upload a file that exists on the memory card, the uploaded file name is altered with a sequential digit as a suffix. For example, Control.pva becomes Control0.pva.
For files with eight character names, a digit overwrites the last character. For example, Motorcon.pva becomes Motorco0.pva.
Memory cards also store font files for languages used by PanelView terminal applications. The font file contains the character set for the language.
The memory card containing the font file must be inserted in the
PanelView terminal while the application is running. The terminal uses the font file to display characters on the application screen.
111
Chapter 4 Using a Memory Card
To view the name of the font file used by an application, select
Terminal Info from the Configuration Mode menu.
Because the memory card must remain in the terminal while the application is running, we recommend that you use the memory card retainer (Cat. No. 2711-NMCC, 2711-NMCD, 2711-NMCE) to secure the card in the card slot. The retainer ensures the card is not accidentally removed or dislodged during terminal operation.
Remove a Memory Card
Follow the procedure below to remove a memory card from the
PanelView terminal. Failure to follow this procedure may result in damage to the card.
1. Select Memory Card from the Configuration Mode menu.
2. Press the Disconnect Card button.
This ensures that all files are closed on the card. A message prompts you to remove the card from the slot. You can continue or abort the operation.
3. Press the Continue button.
4. Remove the memory card from the card slot.
On PV1400 terminals, press the Memory Card Eject button.
112 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
5
Chapter Objectives
Running Applications
This chapter describes operating procedures common to most applications.
•
Screen security
•
Push button operation
•
Control lists
•
Numeric entry controls
•
ASCII entry controls
•
Screen selectors
•
List indicators
•
Multistate indicators
•
Alarms
•
Printing
•
Time or date
•
Message displays
•
Numeric data displays
•
Bar graphs
•
Analog gauges
Application Information
The application designer is responsible for documenting the operation of an application. Before running the application, you should understand what processes are being controlled and monitored.
ATTENTION
Do not press multiple touch screen objects at the same time.
Pressing multiple objects simultaneously may result in unintended operation.
Important Information for
PanelView 300 Micro
Terminal Operations
The Up/Down and Left/Right cursor keys on the PanelView 300 Micro terminal may be assigned as additional function keys. It is the responsibility of the application designer to inform the operator of the assigned functions.
If cursor keys are assigned as function keys, the following (applies to the currently active screen):
•
List Selectors and Increment / Decrement objects are disabled if the Up or Down cursor keys are used as function keys.
113 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 113
Chapter 5 Running Applications
Screen Security
Push Button Operation
•
Simultaneous pressing of Left and Right cursor keys does not cause the terminal to enter Configuration Mode if the Left and
Right cursor keys are assigned as function keys anywhere in the application.
•
If both the Left/Right cursor keys are used on a screen and more than one cursor operated object is present on the screen, all of the cursor operated objects must be assigned to a function key.
Access to some application screens (including the terminal configuration screens) may be restricted. Secured screens require you to enter a password before the screen is displayed. It is the responsibility of the application designer to provide operators with required passwords.
Other screens may allow an authorized operator to select and change the passwords of operators at the terminal.
Screen push buttons function like mechanical push buttons.
Push Button
ON OFF
114
Push buttons have a variety of appearances. Push buttons may change their inner text, fill pattern, border, or shape when pressed (each state assigned different attributes).
OFF
Toggle
Foreground/Background
ON
SLOW
Border, White Fill No Border,
Diagonal Fill
The following are common to most push buttons:
STOP
Ellipse, White Fill
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Control Lists
Running Applications Chapter 5
•
All push buttons are momentarily disabled (0.5 second) after a screen change. This prevents multiple buttons, in the same location on different screens, from being pressed inadvertently.
•
All push buttons must be released on the previous screen before buttons can be pressed on the new screen.
•
Momentary push buttons are assigned a hold time. The hold time maintains the pressed state so that each change of state can be read by the controller at least once. The hold time varies between 0 and 1 second depending on the configured setting.
Control lists perform functions similar to push buttons. They can modify either individual bits or values at a controller address.
Cursor indicates selected item.
Active selection is highlighted.
Vertical bar indicates active control list.
Active List Item
Active item is highlighted.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 115
Chapter 5 Running Applications
116
Active Control List
Has a vertical indicator bar on the left side of the list. Only one control list or numeric entry cursor point can be active on a screen.
To activate a control list:
• touch the object (touch screen terminals only)
• or press the assigned function key
• or on a screen with multiple control lists or numeric entry cursor points, press the Left or Right arrows to move the indicator bar between the objects.
Tank Level Control
Empty Tank
1/4 Fill Level
1/2 Fill Level
Full Tank
Hopper Control
Open Hopper 1
Open Hopper 2
Open Hopper 2
Close Hopper 2
Moves the vertical bar
Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Move the cursor up or down the control list using the Up and Down arrow keys. Cursor operation is configured by the application designer. If the cursor is at the first or last item in a control list, pressing the Up arrow (when at the top) or the Down arrow (when at the bottom) will either:
• cause no movement of the cursor.
• move the cursor to the top or bottom of the list.
Tank Level Control
Empty Tank
1/2 Fill Level
Full Tank
Tank Level Control
Empty Tank
1/2 Fill Level
Full Tank
If the list contains more items than can appear at one time, the list scrolls. If the cursor is at the top or bottom of a scrolling list, the list scrolls one row at a time as the arrow keys are pressed.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Running Applications Chapter 5
List Keys
Touch screen terminals require list keys on the screen to move the cursor in a control list and select entries. The following table shows the list keys.
List Key Type
Move Up
Move Down
Home
End
Page Up
Page Down
Backspace
Enter
Description
Moves the cursor to the previous item in the list.
Moves the cursor to the next item in the list.
Moves the cursor to the first item in the list.
Moves the cursor to the last item in the list.
Moves the cursor up one page in a scrolling list.
Moves the cursor down one page in a scrolling list.
Returns the cursor to the currently highlighted selection.
Confirms a selection and sends the value to the controller if Write on Enter was configured for the control list.
Cursor-piloted Control Lists
On a piloted control list, some items are under controller operation only. In addition, some items may be designated as inactive. You cannot select controller items or inactive items. In both cases, the cursor is hollow when you select the item.
Active State
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
State 5
Cursor at state 2, an active state
Inactive State
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
State 5
State 1
Active State
State 3
State 4
State 5
Cursor at active state 4,
Cursor changes back and highlight moves to selection
117
Chapter 5 Running Applications
Follow these steps to select an item on a control list.
1. Select the control list by:
• touching the screen object (touch screen terminals only).
• pressing its function key.
• pressing the Left or Right arrow keys until the control list has a vertical bar indicating it is active.
2. Move the cursor up or down the list using the Up or Down arrows. If the cursor is hollow, the item cannot be selected.
3. Depending on the application design, you may or may not have to press
↵ to enter the selection indicated by the cursor.
Two types of controls allow a numeric value at a controller address:
Cursor Point and Keypad Enable button.
Cursor Point
Active Cursor
Point
Press F1 to Enter New Speed
Current Speed = 100 RPM
Motor 1
45
Motor 2
100
118
34962
Numeric Entry Cursor Point
Cursor points appear as a box. A vertical line on the left side of the box appears when the cursor point is selected. Data is entered in a numeric entry scratchpad.
Keypad Enable Button
Enter
Value
367 A keypad enable button appears like a standard push button. The data displayed in the button is the last value sent to the button’s tag address. When selected, a numeric entry scratchpad opens.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Running Applications Chapter 5
Scratchpad
Both controls display a numeric entry scratchpad in the center of the screen. The scratchpad shows the current value entered and the range of possible values you can enter.
Current value entered in scratchpad
550/600 Touch Screen only
Terminal Scratchpad
Keypad and Keypad/Touch Screen
Terminal Scratchpad
900/1000/1400 Touch
Screen Terminal Scratchpad
During data entry, wait until the number you enter appears in the scratchpad before entering the next number.
Follow these steps to enter a cursor point.
1. Select the cursor point by:
• touching the object (touch screen terminal only).
• pressing the associated function key.
• pressing the Left or Right arrows until the cursor point shows a vertical bar.
2. Press Enter
↵ or type the first digit of the number you want to enter.
The scratchpad opens.
3. Enter the value using the terminal keypad and press Enter
↵
.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 119
Chapter 5 Running Applications
120
Follow these steps to enter a value by using the keypad enable button.
1. Press the keypad enable button.
The scratchpad opens.
2. Enter the value by using the terminal keypad and press Enter
↵
.
Follow these steps to change an entry on a scratchpad.
1. Press the backspace
← key to delete one character at a time.
2. Enter a new value and press Enter
↵
.
Follow these steps to cancel a scratchpad.
1. Press the Backspace ← key to delete one character at a time.
When pressing the Backspace ← key in an empty scratchpad
PanelView 300, 300 Micro Terminal Thumbwheel Scratchpad
The thumbwheel scratch pad lets you enter values on terminals without a numeric keypad or touch screen by cycling through the available characters one position at a time. Use the Up and Down
cursors to cycle through the available characters. The thumbwheel scratchpad shows:
• display area where the value is entered or modified
•
ESC - F1 key to exit the scratchpad without saving any changes or sending a value
Scroll through and select digits 0…9. You can select the sign (+, -) from the leftmost column. If the decimal point is keypad controlled, you can also select a decimal point (if one has not been previously selected).
Keys
Left / Right Cursor
Up /Down Cursor
Enter Key
Function
Moves the cursor one position to the left or right in the display area. The cursor wraps around to the opposite side when reaching the leftmost or rightmost character,
Cycles through the available characters at the cursor position.
Send the numeric value to the logic controller. Leading and trailing spaces are removed.
TIP
The Up/Down/Left/Right cursor keys can have an autorepeat configured. If you hold down the key, the key is repeated at the set key repeat rate.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Running Applications Chapter 5
ASCII Entry Controls
Display Area
ASCII entry controls let you send an alphanumeric string (up to 128 characters) to a controller. Like numeric entry controls, the ASCII entry control can appear on a screen as a keypad enable button or a cursor point. When either object is activated, the ASCII scratchpad opens.
The look of the scratchpad depends on the terminal.
ASCII Scratchpad - Keypad or Keypad/Touch Screen Terminals
Character Keyboard
¨
ø
Controls Location
Terminal Keypad
Terminal Keypad
Terminal Keypad
SEL F1
INS F2
Function Keys
Function Keys
<< F3 Function Keys
Controls
Select characters from the Character Keyboard by moving the cursor
(with the keypad arrows) over a character and pressing the Sel-F1 function key. The character appears in the Display Area. This area scrolls so you can enter a string that is longer than the Display Area.
All characters are sent to the controller even if not visible.
After entering characters, press
↵
to send the string to the controller.
The leftmost character is placed in the high byte of the first word (of the write tag), the next character in the low byte, and so on.
TIP
DeviceNet ASCII entry allows for byte swapping.
Function
Moves the cursor up, down, left, or right in the Character Keyboard.
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in the Display Area. If the cursor is at the leftmost position when you press
←, the scratchpad closes.
Sends the character string to the assigned write tag address in the controller.
When opening the ASCII scratchpad, the string is highlighted. If you select a character immediately, the terminal clears the Display Area and displays the selected character. If you press a control key, the terminal continues to display the existing string, allowing you to edit it.
Selects the highlighted character and places it at the cursor position in the Display Area.
Toggles between Insert and Overstrike mode. Overstrike mode appears in reverse video. In Insert mode, the selected character is inserted before the cursor in the Display Area. If the maximum number of characters is entered in the Display Area, new characters are ignored. In Overstrike mode, the selected character replaces the character at the cursor in the Display Area.
Moves the cursor one character to the left in the Display Area.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 121
Chapter 5 Running Applications
Controls
>> F4
ESC 5
CTRL F6
Location
Function Keys
Function Keys
Function Keys
Function
Moves the cursor one character to the right in the Display Area.
Closes the scratchpad without making any changes.
Clears the string in the Display Area.
ASCII Scratchpad - PV300 Micro/300 Terminals
The thumbwheel scratch pad lets you enter values on terminals without a numeric keypad or touch screen by cycling through the available characters one position at a time. This is the character sequence:
<space> A - Z, a - z, + - = ( ) [ ] { } < > / \ $ & @ ‘ “ , . ; : ? ! % # * _ ^ ~ ` ¬ ¡ ¿
ß ° £ ç Ç µ â à á ä Ä ê è é É î ì í Ñ ñ ô ò ó ö Ö û ù ú ü Ü, 0 - 9
The default scratchpad indicates <space>. Press the Up or Down cursor keys on a <space> to cycle through the available characters, beginning with A. Press the Down cursor to cycle back through the list, beginning with 9.
The scratchpad has the following function keys.
Keys
F1 - ESC
F2 - Clear
F3 - INS
F4 - DEL
Function
Exits the scratchpad without saving any changes or sending characters to the logic controller.
Clears all characters in the display area.
Inserts a space at the current cursor position.
Deletes the character at the current cursor position.
122 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Running Applications Chapter 5
ASCII Scratchpad - PV550/600 Touch Screen Terminals
Character Keyboard Cursor Display Area
Cursor Control
Keys
Controls
To select characters from the Character Keyboard, press the cursor control keys to move the cursor over a character and then press the
SEL key. The character is entered in the Display Area. This area scrolls so you can enter a string that is longer than the Display Area. All characters are sent to the controller even if not visible.
After entering the characters, press
↵
to send the string to the controller. The leftmost character is placed in the high byte of the first word (of the write tag), the next character in the low byte, and so on.
<<
>>
ESC
CLR
¨
↵
TIP
DeviceNet ASCII entry allows for byte swapping.
.
Controls Function
Moves the cursor up, down, left, or right in the Character Keyboard.
SEL
INS
Selects the highlighted character and places it at the cursor position in the
Display Area.
Toggles between Insert and Overstrike mode. Overstrike mode appears in reverse video. In Insert mode, the selected character is inserted before the cursor in the Display Area. If the maximum number of characters is entered in the Display Area, new characters are ignored. In Overstrike mode, the selected character replaces the character at the cursor in the Display Area.
Moves the cursor one character to the left in the Display Area.
Moves the cursor one character to the right in the Display Area.
Closes the scratchpad without making any changes
Clears the string in the Display Area.
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in the Display Area.
Sends the character string to the assigned write tag address in the controller.
When opening the ASCII scratchpad, the string is highlighted. If you select a character immediately, the terminal clears the Display Area and displays the selected character. If you press a control key, the terminal continues to display the existing string so you can edit it.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 123
Chapter 5 Running Applications
Display Area
ASCII Scratchpad - PV900/1000/1400 Touch Screen Terminals
Character Keyboard
Controls
Select characters by touching the Character Keyboard on the screen.
The character is entered in the Display Area. This area scrolls so you can enter a string that is longer than the Display Area. All characters are sent to the controller even if not visible.
After entering the characters, press
↵ on the scratchpad to send the characters to the controller. The leftmost character is placed in the high byte of the first word (of the write tag), the next character in the low byte, and so on.
TIP
DeviceNet ASCII entry allows for byte swapping.
Controls Function
SHF
(Shift)
By default this function is off and keys are in unshifted state. When you press
SHF, the button appears in reverse video. All character keys, including numbers and symbols, appear in the shifted state. For example, a becomes A;
2 becomes @.
CAPS
INS
By default, keys appear in lowercase. When you press CAPS, the button appears in reverse video. Letters appear and are entered in uppercase but numbers and symbols are not shifted. This state is maintained between power cycles.
Toggles between Insert and Overstrike mode. Overstrike mode appears in reverse video.
In Insert mode, the selected character is inserted before the cursor in the
Display Area. If the maximum number of characters is entered in the Display
Area, new characters are ignored.
<<
>>
ESC
In Overstrike mode, the selected character is replaced at the cursor in the
Display Area.
Moves the cursor one character to the left in the Display Area.
Moves the cursor one character to the right in the Display Area.
Closes the scratchpad without making any changes.
124 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Running Applications Chapter 5
Controls Function
CLR Clears the string in the Display Area.
¨
↵
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in the Display Area.
Sends the character string to the assigned write tag address in the controller.
After pressing
↵ to open the ASCII scratchpad, the string is highlighted. If you select a character immediately, the terminal clears the Display Area and displays the selected character. If you press a control key, the terminal continues to display the existing string so you can edit it.
ASCII Scratchpads in Other Languages
The ASCII Scratchpad is available with character keyboards in:
•
French.
•
German.
•
Italian.
•
Spanish.
If the PanelView terminal is configured for operation in one these languages, the ASCII scratchpad will display the appropriate Character
Keyboard.
The SHF control toggles between SHF/SHF2. In SHF mode, the
Character Keyboard displays the shifted state characters (for example, a to A, and 3 to #). In SHF2 mode, the Character Keyboard displays additional characters available for the language.
125
Chapter 5 Running Applications
Screen Selectors
The 2 types of screen selector controls are Screen List Selectors and
Screen buttons.
Screen List Selector
Vertical Bar indicates active list
Screen Controls
Monitor
Pump Status
Valve Status
Tank Control
Tank
Screen
Previous
Screen
Goto Screen Button
Return Screen Button
Goto and Return screen buttons can have a variety of appearances such as unique inner text, fill pattern, border or shape. Return screen buttons display the previous screen. Goto screen buttons display the assigned screen.
Screen lists display a list of application screens. The selected screen is highlighted.
To activate a screen list:
• touch the object (touch screen only).
• press the assigned function key.
• press the Left or Right arrow key until a vertical bar appears on a screen with multiple screen lists.
Follow these steps to select an item on a screen list.
1. Move the cursor up or down the list by using the Up or
2. Press Enter
↵ to enter the selection.
The selected screen is displayed.
126 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Running Applications Chapter 5
Cursor Operation
Cursor operation is configured by the application designer. If the cursor is at the first or last item in a screen list, pressing the Up arrow (when at top) or Down arrow (when at bottom) will either:
• cause no movement of the cursor
• move the cursor to the top or bottom of the list
Screen Controls
Monitor
Pump Status
Valve Status
Tank Control
Screen Controls
Monitor
Pump Status
Valve Status
Tank Control
If a screen list contains more items than can appear at one time, the list scrolls. If the cursor is at the top or bottom of a scrolling list, the list scrolls one row at a time as the Up/Down arrows are pressed.
List Keys
Touch screen terminals require list keys on the screen to move the cursor in a screen list and select an entry. The following table shows the list keys.
List Key Type
Move Up
Move Down
Home
End
Page Up
Page Down
Backspace
Enter
Description
Moves the cursor to the previous item in the list.
Moves the cursor to the next item in the list.
Moves the cursor to the first item in the list.
Moves the cursor to the last item in the list.
Moves the cursor up one page in a scrolling list.
Moves the cursor down one page in a scrolling list.
Returns the cursor to the currently highlighted selection.
Confirms a selection and displays the screen.
127
Chapter 5 Running Applications
List Indicators
Multistate Indicators
Bar Graph Displays
List indicators highlight an item from a list depending upon the status of either a bit or value at a controller address.
List Indicator
Current status is highlighted
Mixer Speed
Off
Low
Medium
High
Mixer
On
Mixer
Off
An indicator list may have a maximum of 255 entries. The list automatically scrolls to display the status of an item.
TIP
List indicators do not have a cursor like control or screen selector lists.
Multistate indicators display the status of either a bit or value at a controller address.
Multistate indicators can have a variety of appearances. In addition, multistate indicators may change their inner text, fill pattern, or graphic with each state (each state assigned different attributes). Each indicator may have up to 2,000 states.
Temp
High
Temp
Low
OFF
Toggle Foreground/Background Border, White Fill Cross Hatch, No Border
Normal
Ellipse, White Fill
Bar graphs provide a graphical representation of a variable value. Bar graphs can appear with or without scales and border, and can have a variety of fill patterns.
100 +200
-10 0 +10
Vertical Bar
Hatched Fill, No Scale
0
Vertical Bar
Solid Fill, with Scale
-200
3 Vertical Bars
Various Fills, with Scale
2 Horizontal Bars
Different Fill, with Scale
128 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Analog Gauges
Running Applications Chapter 5
The analog gauge uses a rotating needle to display a process variable such as speed, temperature or pressure. The gauge consists of a circular scale with tick-marks, 1… 4 needles, and a label with text or variable data. The circular scale is an integral part of the gauge but can be created separately.
100
80 120
60 140
Pressure
40
160
20
0
200
180
Numeric Data Displays
Numeric Data Displays may appear with or without supporting text.
Flow= 37 Gallons 0 0 0 2 3 9 . 4 5
Depending on the application design, displayed data may have these properties:
• zero fill
• fixed, floating or no decimal point
• different field widths (number of digits)
• various text sizes
• scaled
Message Displays
Message displays contain alphanumeric characters and are displayed when triggered by a controller. The message display can be any size and will not overlap other controls. Messages may contain:
• alphanumeric text
• variable data
• graphics
• time and date
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 129
Chapter 5 Running Applications
Time or Date
Printing
Time and date information can appear as a separate item or in some control/display objects (push buttons, multistate indicators, message displays or data displays). A time and date can appear with or without supporting text.
The date can have a variety of formats.
Month/Day/Year
7/3/01
Day/Month/Year
3/7/01
Year/Month/Day
01/7/3
With Leading Zeroes
07/03/01
With 4 Digit Year
3/7/2001
With User-Defined Separator
7*3*01
The time can also have a variety of formats.
12 Hour Format 2:56
24 Hour Format 14:56 with Seconds
14:56:29
With Time Zone & Time
Standard Designations
07/03/00
With Leading Zeroes
02:56
With User-Defined Separator
14*56*29
Terminals equipped with an RS-232 printer port can print:
• triggered messages in a message display.
• triggered states of a multistate indicator.
• alarm messages.
• alarm list.
Text is printed without formatting options. Print attributes for objects and alarms are defined in the application.
Printing is a background operation. While printing, the terminal continues to update and you can perform other terminal operations.
The terminal prints messages in the order they are received. If the print buffer is full, the terminal displays a queue full warning message.
New print requests are aborted.
The print queue is not maintained between power cycles. Any messages in the queue when the terminal is reset are cleared.
130 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Alarms
Running Applications Chapter 5
Applications that support alarms may contain:
•
Alarm Banner display that pops up when an alarm is triggered
•
Alarm buttons that enable the operator to act on an alarm (Print
Alarm, Acknowledge Alarm, Clear Alarm, Acknowledge All)
•
Alarm List which stores information on triggered alarms (Print
Alarm List or Clear Alarm List button)
Alarm configurations are application dependent. Consult your application designer for details on how to handle alarms for your application.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 131
Chapter 5 Running Applications
132 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter Objectives
Hazardous Location
Considerations
Chapter
6
Installing the PV300 Micro Terminal
This chapter shows how to install the PanelView 300 Micro terminal and covers:
• hazardous locations
• enclosures
• required tools
• mounting dimensions
• clearances
• cutout dimensions
• installing the PV300 micro terminal in a panel
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G; Class III; or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.S
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Class II,
Class III, Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b), 502-4(b), 503-3(b) as appropriate.
See the nameplate on terminal for hazardous locations certifications.
ATTENTION
In Class I, Class II, Class III, Division 2 Hazardous locations, the
PanelView terminal must be wired per the National Electric
Code as it applies to hazardous locations. Peripheral equipment must also be suitable for the location in which it is installed.
133 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 133
Chapter 6 Installing the PV300 Micro Terminal
Enclosures
Required Tools
Use only the following communication cables in Class 1, Division 2,
Hazardous Locations.
Environmental Classification
Class I, Division 2, Hazardous
Locations
Communication Cable
1761-CBL-PM01, Series C
1761-CBL-HM02, Series C
1761-CBL-AM00, Series C
1761-CBL-AP00, Series C
2711-CBL-PM05, Series C
2711-CBL-HM05, Series C
2711-CBL-PM10, Series C
2711-CBL-HM10, Series C
Mount the PanelView 300 Micro terminal in a panel or enclosure to protect the internal circuitry. The terminal meets NEMA 12/13, 4X
(indoor use), IP54 or IP65 ratings only when properly mounted in a panel or enclosure with the equivalent rating. Allow enough space within the enclosure for adequate ventilation. Consider heat produced by other devices in the enclosure. The ambient temperature around the PanelView 300 Micro terminal must be° between 0…55 °C
(32…131 °F).
Make provisions for accessing the side panel of the terminal for wiring, maintenance and troubleshooting.
Other than the tools required to make panel or enclosure cutouts, these tools are required for installation.
•
7 mm (M4) deep-well socket wrench or nut driver
• small slotted screwdriver
• torque wrench (lb-in)
Mounting Dimensions
111 mm
(4.38 in.)
35 mm
(1.39 in.)
48 mm
(1.87 in.)
133 mm
(5.23 in.)
134 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Cutout Dimensions
Installing the PV300 Micro Terminal Chapter 6
Use the full size template shipped with the PV300 Micro terminal to mark the cutout dimensions. The figure below shows a reduced scale cutout. A full scale template is also available inside the back cover of this document.
112 mm (4.42 in.)
102 mm (4.0 in.)
4.5 mm (0.178 in.) diameter
92 mm
54 mm
(3.62 in.)
(2.12 in.)
Clearances
Allow 51 mm (2.0 in.) of space on all sides of the terminal for adequate ventilation and maintenance.
Side, Top and Bottom Clearances
51 mm (2.0 in.)
51 mm (2.0 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 135
Chapter 6 Installing the PV300 Micro Terminal
Install Terminal in Panel
Follow these steps to install the PV300 Micro in a panel.
ATTENTION
•
Disconnect all electrical power from the panel before making cutout.
•
Make sure area around the panel cutout is clear.
•
Take precautions so that metal cuttings do not enter any components already installed in panel.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or damage to the panel components.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template provided with the terminal and remove sharp edges or burrs.
2. Make sure the sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal, particularly around the mounting studs as shown.
This gasket forms a compression type seal. Do not use sealing compounds.
136
3. Place the terminal in the panel cutout.
4. Install the four self-locking nuts, and tighten hand tight.
Self-locking Nuts (4 used, 6 provided)
5. Alternately tighten the self-locking nuts until the terminal is held firmly against the panel.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV300 Micro Terminal Chapter 6
6. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in).
Do not overtighten.
ATTENTION
Mounting nuts must be tightened to a torque of 1.13 Nm
(10 lb-in) to provide a proper seal and to prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation. A properly installed terminal has a small gap between the bezel and enclosure.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 137
Chapter 6 Installing the PV300 Micro Terminal
138 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
7
Installing the PV300 Terminal
Chapter Objectives
Hazardous Location
Considerations
This chapter shows how to install the PanelView 300 terminal and covers:
• hazardous locations.
• enclosures.
• required tools.
• mounting dimensions.
• clearances.
• cutout dimensions.
• installing the PV300 terminal in a panel.
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; Class III; or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Class
II, Class III Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b), 502-4(b),
503-3(b) as appropriate.
See the nameplate on terminal for hazardous locations certifications.
ATTENTION
In Class I, Class II, Class III Division 2 Hazardous locations, the PanelView terminal must be wired per the National
Electric Code as it applies to hazardous locations. Peripheral equipment must also be suitable for the location in which it is installed.
139 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 139
Chapter 7 Installing the PV300 Terminal
Enclosures
Required Tools
The PV300 terminals have an operating temperature code of T4
(maximum operating temperature of 135
°
C or 275 °F). Do not install these terminals in environments where atmospheric gases have ignition temperatures less than 135 °C (275 °F).
Mount the PV300 terminal in a panel or enclosure to protect the internal circuitry. The terminal meets NEMA Type 12/13 and 4X
(indoor use) ratings only when mounted in a panel or enclosure with the equivalent rating.
Allow enough space within the enclosure for adequate ventilation.
Consider heat produced by other devices in the enclosure. The ambient temperature around the terminals must be between 0…55 °C
(32…131 °F).
Make provisions to access the back panel of the terminal for wiring, maintenance, installing a memory card and troubleshooting.
Other than the tools required to make the PV300 panel cutout, the tools required for installation are:
•
7 mm (M4) deep well socket wrench or nut driver
• small slotted screwdriver
• torque wrench (lb-in)
140 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Mounting Dimensions
Installing the PV300 Terminal Chapter 7
The illustration below shows mounting dimensions for the PV300 keypad terminals.
Top View
197 mm
(7.76 in)
69 mm
(2.73 in)
82 mm
(3.21 in)
140 mm
(5.53 in)
Cutout Dimensions
Use the full size template shipped with the PV300 terminal to mark the cutout dimensions. Below is a reduce size cutout.
120 mm
4.71 in.)
109 mm
4.29 in.)
R 4.5 mm via
(0.178 in.)
Recommended Panel
140 mm
5.53 in.)
178 mm
6.99 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 141
Chapter 7 Installing the PV300 Terminal
Clearances
Leave 64 mm (2.5 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
When installing the PV300 terminal, allow space for mounting, air flow, maintenance, memory card and legend strip installation.
Side, Top and Bottom Clearances
Terminal Cutout
Use full size template shipped with terminal
Leave 64 mm (2.5 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
Back Clearance
69 mm
(2.73 in.)
Memory Card
Retainer
134.6 mm
(5.3 in.)
215.9 mm (8.5 in.) is required with card retainer. Allows 6 mm (0.25 in.) in clearance) to insert and remove a memory card with the memory card retainer.
Card
142 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV300 Terminal Chapter 7
Install the PV300 Terminal in a Panel
Follow these steps to install the PV300 terminal in a panel.
ATTENTION
•
Disconnect all electrical power from the panel before making the cutout.
•
Make sure the area around the panel cutout is clear.
•
Do not allow metal cuttings to enter any components that may already be installed in the panel.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or damage to the panel components.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template provided with the terminal and remove any sharp edges or burrs.
2. Make sure the terminal sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal, particularly around the mounting studs as shown.
This gasket forms a compression type seal. Do not use sealing compounds.
Legend Strip Sealing Gasket
3. Verify that the end of the legend strip is fully inserted and does not interfere with the sealing gasket.
4. Place the terminal in the panel cutout.
5. Verify that the opening is the proper size to clear the bezel and to allow the gasket to contact the panel.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 143
Chapter 7 Installing the PV300 Terminal
6. Install the self-locking nuts hand tight.
Protective installation label
Self-locking nuts
(4 used, 6 provided)
Mounting Studs (2 left, 2 right)
7. Alternately tighten the self-locking nuts until the terminal is held firmly against the panel
8. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in).
Do not over-tighten.
ATTENTION
Mounting nuts must be tightened to a torque of 1.13 Nm
(10 lb-in) to provide a proper seal and to prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation. A properly installed terminal has a small gap between the bezel and enclosure.
9. Remove the protective installation label covering the top vents of the terminal.
ATTENTION
Failure to remove the protective installation label covering the top vents could result in overheating and damage to the terminal.
144 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter Objectives
Hazardous Location
Considerations
Chapter
8
Installing the PV550 Terminal
This chapter describes how to mount the PV550 terminal in a panel or enclosure including:
• hazardous locations
• enclosures
• required tools
• mounting dimensions
• clearances
• cutout dimensions
• installing the PV550 terminal in a panel
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D or non-hazardous locations only. Keypad Series H,
Keypad/touch Series H, and touch-only Series B are also rated Class
II, Division 2, Groups F, G, Class III, or non-hazardous locations only.
The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Class II,
Class III, Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b), 502-4(b), 503-3(b) as appropriate.
See the nameplate label on terminal for hazardous locations certifications.
ATTENTION
In Class I, Class II, Class III, Division 2 Hazardous locations, the
PanelView 550 terminal must be wired per the National Electric
Code as it applies to hazardous locations. Peripheral equipment must also be suitable for the location in which it is installed.
145 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 145
Chapter 8 Installing the PV550 Terminal
Enclosures
The following PV550 terminals have an operating temperature code of
T2 (maximum operating temperature of 300
°
C or 572 °F).
• keypad terminals (series G or earlier)
• keypad and touch screen terminals (series G or earlier)
• touch screen only terminals (series A)
Do not install these terminals in environments where atmospheric gases have ignition temperatures less than 300 °C (572 °F).
The following PV550 following PV550 terminals have an operating temperature code of T4 (maximum operating temperature of 135 °C or
275 °F).
• keypad terminals (series H and later)
• keypad and touch screen terminals (series H and later)
• touch screen only terminals (series B and later)
Do not install these terminals in environments where atmospheric gases have ignition temperatures less than 135 °C (275 °F).
Mount the PV550 terminal in a panel or enclosure to protect the internal circuitry. The terminal meets NEMA Type 12/13 and 4X
(indoor use) ratings only when mounted in a panel or enclosure with the equivalent rating.
Allow enough space within the enclosure for adequate ventilation.
Consider heat produced by other devices in the enclosure. The ambient temperature around the terminals must be between 0… 55 °C
(32…131 °F).
Make provisions to access the back panel of the terminal for wiring, maintenance, installing a memory card and troubleshooting.
146 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Required Tools
Mounting Dimensions
Installing the PV550 Terminal Chapter 8
Other than the tools required to make the PV550 panel cutout, the tools required for installation are:
•
7 mm (M4) deep well socket wrench or nut driver
• small slotted screwdriver
• torque wrench (lb-in)
The illustration below shows mounting dimensions for the PV550 terminals.
PV550 Keypad, Keypad & Touch Screen Terminals
Top View
167 mm
(6.57 in.)
86 mm
(3.39 in.)
266 mm
(10.47 in.)
PV550 Touch Screen Terminals
106 mm
(4.17 in.)
Top View
152 mm
(6.00 in.)
64 mm
(2.54 in.)
82 mm
(3.20 in.)
185 mm
(7.28 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 147
Chapter 8 Installing the PV550 Terminal
Clearances
PV550 Touch Screen Terminals
Terminal Cutout Use full size template shipped with terminal
When installing the PV550 terminal, allow space for mounting, air flow, maintenance, memory card and legend strip installation.
Leave 25 mm (1.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
PV550 Keypad, Keypad & Touch Screen Terminals
Terminal Cutout Use full size template shipped with terminal
Leave 25 mm (1.0 in.) for Mounting and Air
Flow
Back Clearance
64 mm
(2.54 in.) Memory Card Retainer
109 mm
(4.3 in.)
Card
188 mm (7.40 in.) is required to insert and remove a memory card with the memory card retainer.
Leave 38 mm (1.5 in.) for Mounting, Air
Flow and Wiring
Connections
Back Clearance
86 mm
(3.39 in.)
Card
207 mm (8.15 in.) is required to insert and remove a memory card with the memory card retainer.
Memory Card Retainer
148 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Cutout Dimensions
Installing the PV550 Terminal Chapter 8
Use the full size template shipped with the PV550 terminal to mark the cutout dimensions. Below is a reduce size cutout.
PV550 Keypad, Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals
25.9 mm
(1.02 in.)
3.3 mm
(0.13 in.)
106 mm
(4.19 in.)
191 mm
(7.51 in.)
243 mm
(9.55 in.)
85 mm
(3.33 in.)
4.8 mm dia
(0.188 in.)
3.3 mm
(0.13 in.)
150 mm
(5.91 in.)
Front Recommended Panel Cutout
Dimensions
144 mm
(5.66 in.)
PV550 Touch Screen Terminals
4.8 mm dia.
(0.188 in.)
98 mm
(3.86 in.)
165 mm
(6.49 in.) 158 mm
(6.20 in.)
Recommended Panel
Cutout Dimensions
R 1.8 mm
(0.07 in.)
125 mm
(4.91 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 149
Chapter 8 Installing the PV550 Terminal
Install the PV550 Terminal in a Panel
Follow these step to install the PV550 terminal in a panel.
ATTENTION
•
Disconnect all electrical power from the panel before making the cutout.
•
Make sure the area around the panel cutout is clear.
•
Do not allow metal cuttings to enter any components that may already be installed in the panel.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or damage to the panel components.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template provided with the terminal and remove any sharp edges or burrs.
2. Make sure the terminal sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal, particularly around the mounting studs as shown.
This gasket forms a compression type seal. Do not use sealing compounds.
150
Sealing Gasket
Adhesive Legend Strip (Keypad and Keypad and Touch Screen
Terminals only)
3. On the keypad and keypad and touch screen terminals, secure the ends of the legend strips to the legend strip adhesive.
4. Place the terminal in the panel cutout.
5. Verify that the opening is the proper size to clear the bezel and to allow the gasket to contact the panel.
6. On the keypad and keypad and touch screen terminals, position the ends of the legend inserts behind the panel cutout.
7. Install the self-locking nuts hand tight.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV550 Terminal Chapter 8
PV550 Keypad, Keypad & Touch Screen Terminals
Mounting Studs (3 top, 3 bottom)
Protective installation label
Self-locking nuts (6 used, 8 provided)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
PV550 Touch Screen Terminal
Protective installation label
Mounting Studs (2 left, 3 right)
Self-locking nuts
(4 used, 8 provided)
8. Alternately tighten the self-locking nuts until the terminal is held firmly against the panel.
9. Tighten nuts to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in).
Do not over-tighten.
ATTENTION
Mounting nuts must be tightened to a torque of 1.13 Nm
(10 lb-in) to provide a proper seal and to prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation. A properly installed terminal has a small gap between the bezel and enclosure.
151
Chapter 8 Installing the PV550 Terminal
10. Remove protective installation label from top vents of terminal.
ATTENTION
Failure to remove the protective installation label covering the top vents could result in overheating and damage to the terminal.
152 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
9
Chapter Objectives
Installing the PV600 Terminal
This chapter describes how to mount the PV600 terminal in a panel or enclosure including:
• hazardous locations
• enclosures
• required tools
• mounting dimensions
• cutout dimensions
• clearances
• installing the PV600 terminal in a panel
Hazardous Location
Considerations
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G; Class III; or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Class II,
Class III, Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b), 502-4(b), 503-3(b) as appropriate.
See the nameplate label on terminal for certifications on hazardous locations.
ATTENTION
In Class I, Class II, Class III, Division 2 Hazardous locations, the
PanelView terminal must be wired per the National Electric
Code as it applies to hazardous locations. Peripheral equipment must also be suitable for the location in which it is installed.
The PV600 terminals have an operating temperature code of T4
(maximum operating temperature of 135
°
C or 275 °F). Do not install the terminals in environments where atmospheric gases have ignition temperatures less than 135 °C (275 °F).
153 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 153
Chapter 9 Installing the PV600 Terminal
Enclosures
Mount the PV600 terminal in a panel or enclosure to protect the internal circuitry. The terminal meets NEMA Type 12/13 and 4X
(indoor use) ratings only when mounted in a panel or enclosure with the equivalent rating.
Allow enough space within the enclosure for adequate ventilation.
Consider heat produced by other devices in the enclosure. The ambient temperature around the terminals must be between:
•
0…55 °C (32…131 °F) for the PV600 keypad or keypad & touch screen terminal
•
0…50 °C (32…122 °F) for the PV600 touch screen only terminal
Make provisions to access the back panel of the terminal for wiring, maintenance, installing a memory card and troubleshooting.
Required Tools
Other than the tools required to make the PV600 panel cutout, the tools required for installation are:
• small slotted screwdriver
• torque wrench (lb-in)
•
#2 phillips screwdriver
•
#2 phillips bit for torque wrench
154 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Mounting Dimensions
Installing the PV600 Terminal Chapter 9
The illustration below shows mounting dimensions for the PV600 terminals.
PV600 Keypad, Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.)
192 mm
(7.55 in.)
91 mm
(3.60 in.)
290 mm
(11.40 in.)
PV600 Touch Screen Terminals
Top View
Top View
152 mm
(6.00 in.) 79 mm
(3.12 in.)
185 mm
(7.28 in.)
116 mm
(4.57 in.)
96 mm
(3.80 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 155
Chapter 9 Installing the PV600 Terminal
Cutout Dimensions
Use the full size template shipped with the PV600 terminal to mark the cutout dimensions. Below is a reduce size cutout.
PV600 Keypad, Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals
167 mm
(6.57 in.)
Recommended Panel Cut-out
Dimensions
264 mm
(10.39 in.)
PV600 Touch Screen Terminals
4.8 mm dia.
(0.188 in.)
165 mm
(6.49 in.) 158 mm
(6.20 in.)
98 mm
(3.86 in.) Recommended Panel Cut-out
Dimensions
R 1.8 mm
(0.07 in.)
125 mm
(4.91 in.)
156 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV600 Terminal Chapter 9
Clearances
When installing the PV600 terminal, allow adequate space for mounting, air flow, maintenance, memory card and legend strip installation.
PV600 Keypad and Keypad and Touch Screen Terminals
Side, Top and Bottom Clearances
51 mm
(2.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
25 mm (1.0 in.) for Mounting and
Air Flow
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.) Back Clearance
Terminal Cutout - Front
View Use full size template shipped with terminal
51 mm (2.0 in.) for Mounting and
Wiring Connections
38 mm (1.5 in.) for
Mounting, Air Flow and Legend Insert
91 mm
(3.60 in.)
Card
Memory Card Retainer
220 mm (8.65 in.) is required to insert and remove a memory card with the memory card retainer.
PV600 Touch Screen Terminals
Side, Top and Bottom Clearances
Back Clearance
25 mm
(1.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
Terminal Cutout Use full size template shipped with terminal
79 mm
(3.12 in.)
Memory Card Retainer
132 mm
(5.21 in.)
211 mm (8.30 in.) is required to insert and remove a memory card with the memory card retainer.
38 mm (1.5 in.) for Mounting, Air
Flow and Wiring Connections
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 157
Chapter 9 Installing the PV600 Terminal
Install the PV600 in a Panel
To install the PV600 terminal in a panel:
ATTENTION
•
Disconnect all electrical power from the panel before making the cutout.
•
Make sure the area around the panel cutout is clear.
•
Do not allow metal cuttings to enter any components that may already be installed in the panel.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or damage to the panel components.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template provided with the terminal and remove any sharp edges or burrs.
2. Make sure the terminal sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal, particularly around the mounting studs as shown.
This gasket forms a compression type seal. Do not use sealing compounds.
Sealing Gasket
Although the keypad legend strip can be installed on the keypad and keypad & touch screen terminals at any time, we recommend that you install the strip after the terminal is installed.
3. Place the terminal in the panel cutout.
158 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
PV600 Touch Screen Terminal
1 Protective installation label
Installing the PV600 Terminal Chapter 9
4. Install the 4 mounting clips (2 on top, 2 on bottom).
The ends of the clips slide into the slots on the terminal.
5. Tighten the clip mounting screws by hand until the gasket seal contacts the mounting surface uniformly.
Self-Locking Nuts
(4 used, 8 provided)
Mounting Studs
(2 left / 2 right)
PV600 Keypad, Keypad & Touch Screen Terminal
2 Protective installation labels
Install 4 mounting clips: Top - left and right slots Bottom - left and right slots
6. Alternately tighten the self-locking nuts or mounting clip screws until the terminal is held firmly against the panel.
7. Tighten the nuts or screws to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in).
Do not over-tighten.
ATTENTION
Mounting nuts must be tightened to a torque of 1.13 Nm
(10 lb-in) to provide a proper seal and to prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation. A properly installed terminal has a small gap between the bezel and enclosure.
8. Remove protective installation labels over top vents of terminal.
ATTENTION
Failure to remove the protective installation label covering the top vents could result in overheating and damage to the terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 159
Chapter 9 Installing the PV600 Terminal
160 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter Objectives
Hazardous Location
Considerations
Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals
Chapter
10
This chapter describes how to mount the PV900 and PV1000 terminals in a panel or enclosure including:
• hazardous locations and enclosures
• required tools
• mounting dimensions
• clearances
• cutout dimensions
• installing the PV900/PV1000 terminal in a panel
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D; or non-hazardous locations only. PV 1000 terminals are also suitable for use in Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G, Class III, or non-hazardous locations. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
•
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Class
II, Class III Division 2.
•
Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
•
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.
•
All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-4(b), 502-4(b),
503-3(b) as appropriate.
See the nameplate on terminal for hazardous locations certifications.
ATTENTION
In Class I, Class II, Class III Division 2 Hazardous locations, the PanelView 900/1000 terminals must be wired per the
National Electric Code as it applies to hazardous locations.
Peripheral equipment must also be suitable for the location in which it is installed.
161 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 161
Chapter 10 Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals
The PV900/PV1000 terminals have an operating temperature code of
T4 (maximum operating temperature of 135
°
C or 275 °F). Do not install the terminals in environments where atmospheric gases have ignition temperatures less than 135 °C (275 °F).
Enclosures
The PV900/PV1000 terminal must be mounted in an environment that provides IEC-1131-2 Pollution degree 2 protection.
Mount the terminal in a panel or enclosure to protect the internal circuitry. The terminal meets NEMA Type 12/13 and 4X (indoor use) ratings only when mounted in a panel or enclosure with the equivalent rating.
Allow enough space within the enclosure for adequate ventilation.
Consider heat produced by other devices in the enclosure. The ambient temperature around the terminals must be between 0…55 °C
(32…131 °F).
Required Tools
Other than the tools required to make the panel cutout, the tools required for installation are:
• small slotted screwdriver
• torque wrench (lb-in) with slotted or phillips head driver
162 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals Chapter 10
PV900 Terminals Mounting
Dimensions
IMPORTANT
PanelView 900 terminals are no longer available. Contact your local sales office or authorized Rockwell Distributor for suitable substitutes.
The illustrations below show mounting dimensions for the PV900 monochrome and color terminals.
PV900 Touch Terminal Mounting Dimensions
249 mm
(9.80 in.)
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.)
90 mm
(3.54 in.)
Top View
336 mm
(13.24 in.)
PV900 Keypad Terminal Mounting Dimensions
249 mm
(9.80 in.)
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.)
90 mm
(3.54 in.)
Top View
406 mm
(15.97 in.)
112 mm
(4.40 in.)
112 mm
(4.40 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 163
Chapter 10 Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals
PV1000 Terminals Mounting
Dimensions
The illustrations below show the mounting dimensions for the PV1000 grayscale and color terminals.
PV1000 Touch Terminal Mounting Dimensions
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.)
282 mm
(11.11 in.)
90 mm
(3.54 in.)
Top View
370 mm
(14.58 in.)
PV1000 Keypad Terminal Mounting Dimensions
112 mm
(4.40 in.)
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.)
282 mm
(11.11 in.)
90 mm
(3.54 in.)
Top View
112 mm
(4.40 in.)
423 mm
(16.64 in.)
164 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Clearances
Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals Chapter 10
Allow adequate space for mounting, air flow, maintenance, memory card and legend strip installation.
IMPORTANT
If using a memory card and/or memory card retainer, allow a back clearance to load the card.
Side, Top and Bottom Clearances
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
Terminal Cutout - Front View
Use full size template shipped with terminal
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for Mounting, Air
Flow and Legend
Insert
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for Mounting and Wiring Connections
Back Clearance
Memory Card Retainer
6.9 mm
(0.27 in.)
90 mm
(3.54 in.)
Card
222 mm (8.73 in.) is required to insert and remove a memory card with the memory card retainer.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 165
Chapter 10 Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals
Cutout Dimensions
Use the full size template shipped with the PV900 and PV1000 terminals to mark the cutout dimensions. The following illustrations show reduced cutouts for these terminals with dimensions.
PV900 Panel Cutout Dimensions
PV900 Keypad Terminals PV900 Touch Screen Terminals
224 mm
(8.8 in.) Recommended Panel Cut-out Dimensions
224 mm
(8.8 in.)
Recommended Panel Cut-out Dimensions
375 mm
(14.75 in.)
PV1000 Panel Cutout Dimensions
PV1000 Keypad Terminals
305 mm
(12.00 in.)
PV1000 Touch Screen Terminals
257 mm
(10.11 in.) Recommended Panel Cut-out Dimensions
257 mm
(10.11 in.)
Recommended Panel Cut-out Dimensions
390 mm
(15.35 in.)
338 mm
(13.29 in.)
166 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals Chapter 10
Install the
PV900/PV1000 Terminals in a Panel
Follow these steps to install the PV900/PV1000 terminal in a panel.
ATTENTION
•
Disconnect all electrical power from the panel before making the cutout.
•
Make sure the area around the panel cutout is clear.
•
Do not allow metal cuttings to enter any components that may already be installed in the panel.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or damage to the panel components.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template provided with the terminal and remove any sharp edges or burrs.
2. Make sure the terminal sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal, particularly around the mounting studs as shown.
This gasket forms a compression type seal. Do not use sealing compounds.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Sealing Gasket
Although the keypad legend strip can be installed any time, we recommend that you install it after the terminal is installed.
3. Place the terminal in the panel cutout.
167
Chapter 10 Installing the PV900/1000 Terminals
4. Install the 6 mounting clips (2 on top, 2 on bottom, 1 on each side).
The ends of the clips slide into the slots on the terminal.
5. Tighten the clip mounting screws by hand until the gasket seal contacts the mounting surface uniformly.
Protective installation labels
Install six mounting clips:
Top - left and right slots
Bottom - left and right slots
Sides - left and right
168
6. Alternately tighten the mounting clip screws to a torque of
1.13 Nm (10 lb-in).
Do not over-tighten.
ATTENTION
Mounting nuts must be tightened to a torque of 1.13 Nm
(10 lb-in) to provide a proper seal and to prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation. A properly installed terminal has a small gap between the bezel and enclosure.
7. Remove the two protective labels covering the top vents of the terminal.
ATTENTION
Failure to remove the protective installation label covering the top vents could result in overheating and damage to the terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter
11
Installing the PV1400 Terminal
Chapter Objectives
Enclosures
IMPORTANT
PanelView 1400 terminals are no longer available. Contact your local sales office or authorized Rockwell Distributor for suitable substitutes.
This chapter describes how to mount the PV1400 terminal in a panel or enclosure including:
• enclosures
• recommended tools
• mounting dimensions
• clearances
• cutout dimensions
• installing the PV1400 terminal in a panel
The PV1400 terminal must be mounted in an environment that provides IEC-1131-2 Pollution degree 2 protection.
Mount the PV1400 terminal in a panel or enclosure to protect the internal circuitry. The terminal meets NEMA Type 12/13 and 4X
(indoor use) ratings only when mounted in a panel or enclosure with the equivalent rating.
Allow enough space within the enclosure for adequate ventilation.
Consider heat produced by other devices in the enclosure. The ambient temperature around the terminals must be between 0…55 °C
(32…131 °F).
Make provisions to access the back sides of the terminal. Access is required for wiring, routine maintenance, adjusting brightness/contrast, installing a memory card and troubleshooting.
Required Tools
In addition to the tools required to make the panel cutout, you need the tools below.
For clip mounting:
• socket screwdriver (phillips head or slotted)
•
406 mm (16 in.) extension rod (minimum)
• socket driver (in/lab torque wrench recommended)
169 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 169
Chapter 11 Installing the PV1400 Terminal
Mounting Dimensions
For stud mounting:
•
7/32 and 3/8 in. socket
•
406 mm (16 in.) extension rod (minimum)
• socket driver (lb-in torque wrench recommended)
The illustrations below show mounting dimensions for the PV1400 terminals.
PV1400 Touch Terminal Mounting Dimensions
3.3 mm
(0.13 in.)
Top View
355 mm
(13.97 in.)
370 mm
(14.58 in.)
394 mm
(15.53 in.)
441 mm
(17.37 in.)
PV1400 Keypad Terminal Mounting Dimensions
3.3 mm
(0.13 in.)
Top View
3 mm
(13.97 in.)
370 mm
(14.58 in.)
483 mm
(19.0 in.)
394 mm
(15.53 in.)
170 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Clearances
Installing the PV1400 Terminal Chapter 11
Allow adequate space for mounting, air flow, maintenance, adjusting brightness/contrast, memory card and legend strip installation.
IMPORTANT
If using a memory card, allow a back clearance to load the card.
Side, Top and Bottom Clearances
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
Terminal Cutout - Front View
Use full size template shipped with terminal
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for Mounting
Back Clearance
Leave 51 mm (2.0 in.) for
Mounting and Air Flow
3.3 mm
(0.13 in.)
370 mm
(14.58 in.)
Approximately
400 mm (15.74 in.) is required to insert and load a memory card.
Card
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 171
Chapter 11 Installing the PV1400 Terminal
Cutout Dimensions
Use the full size template provided with the terminal to mark cutout dimensions. The illustration below shows reduced size cutouts with dimensions.
Ignore stud holes if mounting terminal using panel clips.
PV1400 Keypad Terminals
170 mm
(6.70 in.)
419 mm
(16.50 in.)
110 mm
(4.35 in.)
221 mm
(8.70 in.)
5.56 mm (7/32 in.)
18 holes
140 mm
(5.50 in.)
38 mm
(1.50 in.)
305 mm
(12.0 in.)
233 mm
(9.16 in.)
PV1400 Touch Screen Terminals
391 mm
(15.40 in.)
127 mm
(5.0 in.)
Ignore stud holes if mounting terminal using panel clips.
169 mm
(6.65 in.)
5.56 mm (7/32 in.)
18 holes
140 mm
(5.50 in.)
305 mm
(12.0 in.)
212 mm
(8.35 in.)
172 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV1400 Terminal Chapter 11
Install the PV1400 Terminal in a Panel
This section gives procedures for mounting a PV1400 terminal by using:
• mounting clips (10 shipped with terminal, 10 required)
• mounting studs (ordered separately, Catalog No. 2711-NP3)
ATTENTION
•
Disconnect all electrical power from the panel before making the cutout.
•
Make sure the area around the panel cutout is clear.
•
Do not allow metal cuttings to enter any components that may already be installed in the panel.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or damage to the panel components.
Follow these steps to install the PV1400 terminal in a panel using clips.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template provided with the terminal and remove any sharp edges or burrs.
Do not drill the mounting stud holes if you are using clips.
2. Make sure the sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal, particularly around the mounting studs as shown.
This gasket forms a compression type seal. Do not use sealing compounds.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Sealing Gasket
Although the keypad legend strip can be installed any time, we recommend that you install them after the terminal is installed.
3. Place the PV1400 terminal in the panel cutout.
The terminal will snap into the panel as the temporary retaining tabs lock against the panel.
173
Chapter 11 Installing the PV1400 Terminal
TIP
The PV1400 terminal has two metal tabs (on bottom edge) that temporarily lock the terminal against the panel. These tabs only facilitate installation of the mounting hardware. The tabs are not designed to provide permanent mounting.
4. Install the 10 mounting clips (three on top, three on bottom, two on each side).
The ends of the clips slide into slots on the terminal.
5. Tighten the clip mounting screws hand tight.
Install 10 Mounting Clips
Keypad Version
= Recommended
Placement of
Mounting Clips
174
Touch Screen
Version
6. Alternately tighten the mounting clip screws until the terminal is held firmly against the panel.
7. Tighten mounting screws to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in.).
Do not over-tighten.
ATTENTION
Mounting nuts must be tightened to a torque of 1.13 Nm
(10 lb-in.) to provide a proper seal and to prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Installing the PV1400 Terminal Chapter 11
Mount Terminal with Mounting Studs
Follow these steps to install the PV1400 terminal in a panel by using mounting studs.
1. Cut an opening in the panel by using the panel cutout template shipped with the terminal.
2. Carefully drill 5.56 mm (7/32 in.) holes for studs as indicated.
3. Install the mounting studs (Cat. No. 2711-NP3) using a 7/32-inch socket on the end of the stud.
4. Turn stud clockwise and tighten to approximately 1.13 Nm
(10 in.-lb).
Gasket
Bezel
Mounting Studs
(Qty 18 for Keypad, 12 for Touch)
Panel or Enclosure
Self-locking Nuts
Spacer
5. Make sure the sealing gasket is properly positioned on the terminal.
This gasket forms a compression type seal (NEMA Type 4). Do not use sealing compounds .
ATTENTION
Be careful not to damage the sealing gasket when installing or removing studs. A damaged seal may result in damage to the PanelView terminal and other panel components due to a leaking seal.
6. Place the PV1400 terminal in the panel cutout aligning the studs with the mounting holes.
175
Chapter 11 Installing the PV1400 Terminal
7. Install the self-locking nuts hand tight.
ATTENTION
Tighten mounting nuts to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in.) to provide a proper seal and prevent potential damage to the terminal. Allen-Bradley assumes no responsibility for water or chemical damage to the terminal or other equipment within the enclosure because of improper installation. A properly installed terminal has a small gap between the bezel and enclosure.
8. Alternately tighten the self-locking nuts (use 3/8 in. socket) until the PV1400 terminal is held firmly against the panel.
The recommended tightening sequence is shown below.
The studs have an integral spacer that prevents the gasket from being over-compressed. The amount of torque required increases significantly as the gasket reaches the proper compression. Tighten nuts to a torque of 1.13 Nm (10 lb-in.).
16
18
4
7
9 1 5 13
Recommended Torque
Sequence Keypad
Terminals
12
15
3
8
11
17 10 2 6 14
7
4
12
9
10
1
Recommended
Torque Sequence
Touch Terminals
2
5
6
Note the sequence starts at center studs and continues to the corner studs.
8
3
11
176 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Chapter Objectives
Wiring and Safety
Guidelines
Chapter
12
Terminal Connections
This chapter describes network and device connections for PanelView terminals.
•
Wiring and safety guidelines
•
Cable charts
•
Remote I/O connections
•
DH+ connections
•
DH-485 connections
•
RS-232 (DH-485) connections
•
RS-232 (DF1) connections
•
ControlNet connections
•
DeviceNet connections
•
EtherNet/IP connections
•
PanelView 300 Micro connections
•
Computer or printer connection to RS-232 serial port
Use publication NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces when wiring the PanelView terminals. In addition to the NFPA general guidelines:
• route communication cables to terminal by a separate path from incoming power.
IMPORTANT
Do not run signal wiring and power wiring in the same conduit.
• where power and communication lines must cross, they should cross at right angles. Communication lines can be installed in the same conduit as low level dc I/O lines (less than 10 volts).
• grounding minimizes noise from Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) and is a safety measure in electrical installations.
• use the National Electric Code published by the National Fire
Protection Association as a source for grounding.
177 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 177
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Cable Charts
Refer to the following charts for a summary of PanelView terminal connections to controllers and network interface modules.
Runtime Communication Cables - to Processors
Protocol PanelView Standard Comm Port Cables: PanelView to Processor
SLC-500, 5/01,
5/02
CH1 RJ45
(DH-485)
N/A
SLC-5/03, 5/04, 5/05
CH0 (9-pin RS-232)
(DF1 or DH-485)
DF1 xxx16 xxx17 xxx18
RS-232 (DF1) Comm Port (8-pin Mini
Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx18
1761-CBL-AP00
(0.5 m/1.5 ft)
1761-CBL-PM02
(2 m/6.5 ft)
2711-CBL-PM05
(5 m/16 ft)
2711-CBL-PM10
(10 m/32 ft)
N/A
DH-485 xxx2 xxx3 xxx5 xxx9 xxx19
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
(9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx16, 2711-xxx17
RS-232 (DH-485) Comm Port (8-pin
Mini Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx19
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication
Port (9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx5, 2711-xxx9
DH-485 Communication Port (RJ45)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx2, 2711-xxx3 use AIC+ Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port 1 or 2 use AIC+ Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port 1 or 2
1747-C10
(2 m/6 ft)
1747-C11
(1 ft/0.3 m)
1747-C20
(6 m/20 ft)
2711-NC13 (5 m/16 ft)
2711-NC14 (10 m/32 ft)
2706-NC13 (3 m/10 ft)
N/A
1761-CBL-AP00
(0.5 m/1.5 ft)
1761-CBL-PM02
(2 m/6.5 ft)
2711-CBL-PM05
(5 m/16 ft)
2711-CBL-PM10
(10 m/32 ft)
2711-NC13 (5 m/16 ft)
2711-NC14 (10 m/32 ft)
2706-NC13 (3 m/10 ft) use AIC+ Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port 3
SLC 5/03
CH1 (RJ45)
(DH-485)
N/A use AIC+
Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port
1 or 2 use AIC+
Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port
1 or 2
1747-C10
(2 m/6 ft)
1747-C11
(1 ft/0.3 m)
1747-C20
(6 m/20 ft)
SLC 5/04
CH1
(DH+)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SLC 5/05
CH1
(ENET)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
178 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Protocol PanelView Standard Comm Port Cables: PanelView to Processor
SLC-500, 5/01,
5/02
CH1 RJ45
(DH-485)
SLC-5/03, 5/04, 5/05
CH0 (9-pin RS-232)
(DF1 or DH-485)
DeviceNet xxx10
ControlNet xxx15
DeviceNet Communication Port
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx10 to SLC 5/02 with 1747-SDN and
DeviceNet cable
N/A
SLC 5/03
CH1 (RJ45)
(DH-485)
SLC 5/04
CH1
(DH+) use 1747-SDN Module with DeviceNet cable
SLC 5/05
CH1
(ENET) not applicable - PanelView does not support SLC ControlNet configurations
EtherNet/IP xxx20
ControlNet Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx15
Ethernet Comm Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx20
N/A N/A N/A N/A Ethernet cable
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 179
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Protocol
DF1 xxx16 xxx17 xxx18
DH-485 xxx2 xxx3 xxx5 xxx9 xxx19
DeviceNet xxx10
ControlNet xxx15
PanelView Standard Comm Port
RS-232 (DF1) Comm Port (8-pin Mini
Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx18
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
(9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx16, 2711-xxx17
RS-232 (DH-485) Comm Port (8-pin Mini
Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx19
1761-CBL-AP00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10
(32 ft/10 m)
(9-to-25 pin adapter required)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
(9-to-25 pin adapter required)
N/A
1761-CBL-AP00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10
(32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
N/A
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication Port
(9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx5, 2711-xxx9
DH-485 Communication Port (RJ45)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx2, 2711-xxx3
DeviceNet Communication Port
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx10
ControlNet Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx15
Cables: PanelView to Processor
PLC-5, PLC-5C, PLC-5E
CH0 (25-pin RS-232)
(DF1)
ControlLogix
CH0 (9-pin RS-232)
(DF1)
N/A
N/A use 1771-SDN Module with
DeviceNet cable to PLC-5C with
ControlNet cable
N/A
N/A use 1756-DNB Module with
DeviceNet cable use 1756-CNB Module with
ControlNet cable
MicroLogix 1000, 1200,
1500LSP
CH0 (8-pin Mini DIN)
(DF1 or DH-485)
1761-CBL-AM00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-HM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-HM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-HM10
(32 ft/10 m)
(1)
2711-NC21 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC22 (49 ft/15 m)
(null modem not required)
(1)
1761-CBL-AM00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-HM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-HM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-HM10
(32 ft/10 m)
(1)
2711-NC21 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC22 (49 ft/15 m)
(null modem not required)
(1) use AIC+ Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port 3 use 1761-NET-DNI
Module with DeviceNet cable
N/A
180 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Protocol PanelView Standard Comm Port Cables: PanelView to Processor
PLC-5, PLC-5C, PLC-5E
CH0 (25-pin RS-232)
(DF1)
ControlLogix
CH0 (9-pin RS-232)
(DF1)
EtherNet/IP xxx20
Remote I/O xxx1
DH+ xxx8
Ethernet Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx20
Remote I/O Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx1
DH+ Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx8 to PLC-5E with
Ethernet cable shielded twinaxial cable
(1770-CD) shielded twinaxial cable
(1770-CD)
Use 1756-ENET Module with
Ethernet cable use 1756-DHRIO Module with shielded twinaxial cable
(1770-CD) use 1756-DHRIO Module with shielded twinaxial cable
(1770-CD)
(1)
AIC + Module recommended for isolation purposes when PanelView and controller are not on same power supply
MicroLogix 1000, 1200,
1500LSP
CH0 (8-pin Mini DIN)
(DF1 or DH-485)
Use 1761-NET-ENI
Module with Ethernet cable
N/A
N/A
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 181
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Protocol PanelView Standard Comm Port Cables: PanelView to Processor
DF1 xxx16 xxx17 xxx18
DH-485 xxx2 xxx3 xxx5 xxx9 xxx19
RS-232 (DF1) Comm Port (8-pin Mini
Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx18
RS-232 (DF1) Communication Port
(9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx16, 2711-xxx17
RS-232 (DH-485) Comm Port (8-pin
Mini Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx19
MicroLogix 1500LRP
CH1 (9-pin RS-232)
(DF1 or DH-485)
1761-CBL-AP00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10 (32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
1761-CBL-AP00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10 (32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
CompactLogix CH0
(9-pin RS-232)
(DF1 or DH-485)
1761-CBL-AP00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10 (32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
1761-CBL-AP00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10 (32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
DeviceNet xxx10
ControlNet xxx15
EtherNet/IP xxx20
Remote I/O xxx1
DH+ xxx8
RS-232 (DH-485) Communication
Port (9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx6, 2711-xxx9
DH-485 Communication Port (RJ45)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx2, 2711-xxx3
DeviceNet Communication Port
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx10
ControlNet Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx15
Ethernet Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx20
Remote I/O Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx1
DH+ Communication Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-xxx8 use AIC+ Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port 3 use 1761-NET-DNI Module with
DeviceNet cable
N/A use 1761-NET-ENI
Module with
Ethernet cable
N/A
N/A use AIC+ Module
(1761-NET-AIC)
Connect to Port 3
N/A use 1761-NET-ENI
Module with
Ethernet cable
N/A
N/A
FlexLogix
CH0 (9-pin RS-232)
(DF1)
1761-CBL-AP00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10 (32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A use 1788-CNC module with ControlNet cable use 1761-NET-ENI Module with
Ethernet cable
N/A
N/A
182 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Runtime Communication Cables - to Network Interface Module
Protocol PanelView Standard Comm
Port
DF1 xxx16 xxx17 xxx18
DH-485 xxx2 xxx3 xxx5 xxx9 xxx19
RS-232 (DF1) Comm Port
(8-pin Mini Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx18
RS-232 (DF1) Communication
Port (9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx16, 2711-xxx17
RS-232 (DH-485) Comm Port
(8-pin Mini Din)
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-xxx19
RS-232 (DH-485)
Communication Port (9-pin)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx5, 2711-xxx9
DH-485 Communication Port
(RJ45)
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-xxx2, 2711-xxx3
Cables: PanelView to Interface Module
1747-AIC
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1747-C10
(6 ft/2 m)
1747-C11
(1 ft/0.3 m)
1747-C20
(20 ft/6 m)
1761-NET-AIC
1761-CBL-AP00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10
(32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
1761-CBL-AM00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-HM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-HM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-HM10 (32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC21 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC22 (49 ft/15 m)
(null modem not required)
N/A
1761-CBL-AP00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10
(32 ft/10 m)
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
N/A
1761-CBL-AM00 (1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-HM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-HM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-HM10 (32 ft/10 m)
N/A
2711-NC21 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC22 (49 ft/15 m)
(null modem not required)
N/A
N/A
1761-CBL-A
S03
(10 ft / 3 m)
1761-CBL-A
S09
(30 ft / 9 m)
1761-NET-DNI or
1761-NET-ENI
1761-CBL-AM00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-HM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-HM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-HM10
(32 ft/10 m)
1761-CBL-AP00
(1.5 ft/0.5 m)
1761-CBL-PM02
(6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05
(16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10
(32 ft/10 m)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 183
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Application File Upload/Download (Direct) Cables
PanelView Standard Type
PanelView 300 Micro
2711-M3A18L1, -M3A19L1
DH-485 Comm Port only or DH-485 Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 300, 550/550T, 600/600T
2711-KxA2, -KxC2, -BxA2, -BxA3, -TxA2, -TxC2, 2711-KxA3, -KxC3, -KxG3, -BxA3, -BxC3, -TxA3,
-TxC3, -TxG3
RS-232 (DH-485) Comm Port only or RS-232 (DH-485) Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 300, 550/550T, 600/600T
2711-KxA5, -KxC5, -BxA5, -BxC5, -TxA5, -TxC5, 2711-KxA9, -KxC9, -KxG9, -BxA9, -BxC9, -TxA9,
-TxC9, -TxG9
RS-232 (DF1) Comm Port only
PanelView 300
2711-K3A17
RS-232 (DF1) Comm Port & RS-232 Printer/Download Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA16, -KxC16, -KxG16, -BxA16, -BxC16, -TxA16, -TxC16, -TxG16
DeviceNet Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 300 - 1400
2711-KxA10, -KxC10, -KxG10, -BxA10, -BxC10, -TxA10, -TxC10, -TxG10
ControlNet Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA15, -KxC15, -KxG15, -BxA15, -BxC15, -TxA15, -TxC15, -TxG15
Remote I/O Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA1, -KxC1, -KxG1, -BxA1, -BxC1, -TxA1, -TxC1, -TxG1
Ethernet Comm Port and RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA20, -KxC20, -KxG20, -BxA20, -BxC20, -TxA20, -TxC20, -TxG20
DH+ Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA8, -KxC8, -KxG8, -BxA8, -BxC8, -TxA8, -TxC8, -TxG8
Profibus Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA12, -KxC12, -KxG12, -BxA12, -BxC12, -TxA12, -TxC12, -TxG12
Modbus Comm Port & RS-232 Printer Port
PanelView 550T - 1400
2711-KxA14, -KxC14, -KxG14, -BxA14, -BxC14, -TxA14, -TxC14, -TxG14
Cable to Personal Computer
1761-CBL-PM02 (6.5 ft/2 m)
2711-CBL-PM05 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-CBL-PM10 (32 ft/10 m)
1747-PIC
2711-NC13 (16 ft/5 m)
2711-NC14 (32 ft/10 m)
2706-NC13 (10 ft/3 m)
184 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Remote I/O Terminal
Connections
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
This section describes connections for the remote I/O PanelView terminals including:
• remote I/O port.
• supported controllers.
• making remote I/O connections.
• remote I/O pass-through.
Remote I/O Terminal Ports
The remote I/O versions of the PanelView terminal (catalog numbers ending in 1) have a remote I/O port and an RS-232 port.
Use the remote I/O port to:
• communicate with the remote I/O scanner port on a PLC controller.
• communicate with SLC controllers using a 1747-SN remote I/O scanner module.
• communicate with other remote I/O scanners.
• transfer applications using remote I/O pass-through.
Use the RS-232 Port to:
• transfer PanelView applications between a computer and the terminal.
• connect a printer.
For details on connecting to the RS-232 port, see page 223.
PanelView 550 Keypad PanelView 1000 Keypad
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Remote I/O Port RS-232 Port
Remote I/O Port RS-232 Port
185
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Supported Controllers
The remote I/O terminal connects to any Allen-Bradley 1771 remote
I/O link. Applicable host controllers include almost all Allen-Bradley
PLCs, computers, VME controllers, and DEC Q-Bus controllers with a remote I/O scanner module. New PLC product releases that support
1771 remote I/O will also work with PanelView.
When connecting a PanelView terminal to a controller refer to the user manual for your controller or scanner module for connection diagrams and any remote I/O limitations. The table below provides a summary of possible connections.
Controller
ControlLogix
PLC-5/11, 5/15
(1)
,
5/20, 5/25,
5/30, 5/60, 5/80,
5/250
PLC-5/10, 5/12
Scanner
1756-DHRIO
PLC Integral 1771-SN
Comments
Connect PanelView terminals through the 1756-DHRIO module.
Connect PanelView terminals directly to the remote I/O port (scanner mode). Connect PanelView terminals through the 1771-SN subscanner module.
PLC-2
PLC-3 and
PLC-3/10
SLC-5/02, 5/03, 5/04,
5/05
1771-SN
1771-SN or 1772-SD2
None
PLC-3/10 remote I/O Scanner
(3)
1747-SN
(2)
Connect PanelView terminals through the 1771-SN subscanner module.
Connect PanelView terminals to the PLC-2 family of processors through a 1771-SN I/O subscanner module.
Connect PanelView terminals directly to a PLC-3.
Connect PanelView terminals to the PLC-3/10 through the remote I/O scanner.
Connect PanelView terminals through the 1747-SN subscanner module. Each module provides an additional remote I/O link for up to
4 racks.
IBM PC
VME
DEC Q-BUS
6008-SI
6008-SV
6008-SQ
Important: Only Series B and later versions of the 1747-SN subscanner support block transfers.
6008-SI I/O scanner is compatible with IBM PC or compatible computers. The scanner provides a computer access to the 1771 remote I/O link.
6008-SV I/O scanner provides access to the 1771 remote I/O link for
VME controllers.
6008-SQ I/O scanner provides access to the 1771 remote I/O link for
DEC Q-BUS controllers.
(1)
If using a PLC-5/15 with partial rack addressing and block transfers, you must use Series B, Rev. J or later.
(2)
If using a 1772-SD2 Remote Scanner/Distribution Panel, use revision 3 or later.
(3)
If using a 1775-S4A Remote Scanner/Distribution Panel, user Series B or later.
186 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Making Remote I/O Connections
To connect a PanelView terminal to a remote I/O scanner, use cable
Catalog No. 1770-CD (equivalent to Belden 9463). The maximum cable length (link distance) is determined by the communication rate.
•
2,800 m (10,000 ft) for 57.6K baud
•
1,400 m (5,000 ft) for 115.2K baud
•
700 m (2,500 ft) for 230.4K baud
See Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1. The user manual for the I/O scanner module also provides cabling information.
PanelView 550 Keypad
PanelView 1000 Keypad
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Remote I/O Port 3-pin Terminal Block
Connector
Clear = 2
Shield
Blue = 1
Connector (One provided with terminal)
TIP
TIP
To PLC or Scanner
Remote I/O Port
Cable (Cat. No. 1770-CD)
The polarity of the remote I/O connector on the PanelView terminal is reversed from the PLC Scanner connector. However, the polarity is the same as the scanner card connection to the
SLC controller.
If the terminal is the last device on the link, connect a 1/2 watt terminating resistor across terminals 1 and 2. The value of the resistor depends on the remote I/O communication rate:
• for 57.6 kilobaud and 115.2 kilobaud, use a 150-ohm resistor
• for 230 kilobaud, use an 82-ohm resistor
187
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
188
Remote I/O Pass-through using DH+
Remote I/O terminals allow the transfer of applications from a computer on the Allen-Bradley DH+ link to a PLC-5 or SLC-5/04 controller. The controller passes data to the PanelView terminal over the remote I/O network.
PLC-5
DH+
Computer Remote I/O
Pass-through
Remote I/O Network
PanelView
Follow these steps to transfer an application using remote I/O pass-through:
1. A Data Highway Plus Interface Module must be installed in the computer.
Allen-Bradley offers a variety of interface cards for a DH+ connection between a computer and a controller.
2. The appropriate communication driver must be configured on the computer.
3. Connect the computer to the PLC.
See the instruction sheets provided with the communication module or card to select the proper cable.
4. Connect the cable between the computer and the controller.
5. Pass-through must be enabled for the terminal.
6. Check the RIO Configuration screen on the terminal’s
Configuration Mode menu.
Pass-through is enabled using the out-of-box application provided with the terminal or when defining remote I/O parameters in the PanelBuilder32 software.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
7. Refer to the online help in the PanelBuilder32 software for procedures on how to transfer applications by using pass-through.
TIP
If the terminal is the last device on the link, connect a 1/2 watt terminating resistor across terminals 1 and 2. The value of the resistor depends on the DH+ baud rate:
• for 57.6 kilobaud and 115.2 kilobaud, use a 150-ohm resistor
• for 230 kilobaud, use an 82-ohm resistor
DH+ Terminal Connections
This section describes connections for the DH+ PanelView terminals including:
•
DH+ ports
• typical DH+ system configuration
• making DH+ connections
DH+ Terminal Ports
The DH+ versions of the PanelView terminals (catalog numbers ending in 8) have a DH+ port and an RS-232 port.
Use the DH+ port to:
• communicate with a PLC-5 controller on the Allen-Bradley DH+ link via the processor’s DH+ port.
• communicate with an SLC 5/04 controller (Channel 1 port) on the Allen-Bradley DH+ link via the processor’s DH+ port.
• communicate with a ControlLogix controller on the
Allen-Bradley DH+ link via the 1756-DHRIO module.
• transfer applications over the DH+ link from a computer with a
DH+ connection.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 189
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Use the RS-232 port to:
• transfer PanelView applications between a computer and the
DH+ terminal using a direct connection.
• connect a printer. For connection details, see the last section in this chapter.
PanelView 550
PanelView 1000
DH+ Port
Power
RS-232 Port
DH+ Port RS-232 Port
Typical DH+ System Configuration
For more information on the Allen-Bradley DH+ link, refer to the Data
Highway/Data Highway Plus/Data Highway II/Data Highway 485
Cable Installation Manual, publication 1770-6.2.2.
SLC 5/04
1
PanelView 1000 DH+ Terminal
DH+ Port
PLC-5
Download applications to PanelView 1 over local DH+ link 2 over a direct serial link
DH+ RSLinx Port DH+ communication card installed in computer
1
PanelView 600 DH+ Terminal
Computer for developing
PanelView applications
DH+ Port RS-232 Port
2 Serial Link
190 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
PLC 5/11, -5/20, 5/26 Processor
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Making DH+ Connections
Use the Belden 9463 twin axial cable (1770-CD) to connect a DH+
PanelView terminal to the DH+ link.
You can connect a DH+ link in 2 ways.
• trunk line/drop line - from the drop line to the connector screw terminals on the DH+ connectors of the processor
• daisy chain - to the connector screw terminals on the DH+ connectors on the processor
Follow these guidelines when installing DH+ communication links.
• do not exceed these cable lengths:
– trunk line-cable length: 3,048 m (10,000 ft)
– drop-cable length: 30.4 m (100 ft)
• do not connect more than 64 stations on a single DH+ link
PLC-5/30, -5/40, -5/46, -5/40L, - 5/60, -5/60C
-5/60L, -5/80, 5/80C, -5/86 Processor
PanelView 550 DH+ Terminal
Clear 1
Shield SH
Blue 2
1770-CD (Belden
Cable)
Blue 2
Shield SH
Clear 1
82 or 150 Ohm Resistor
PanelView 1000 DH+ Terminal
Blue 2
Shield SH
Clear 1
Clear = 1
Shield
82 or 150 Ohm Resistor
Blue = 2
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 191
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
DH-485 Terminal
Connections
This section describes connections for the DH-485 PanelView terminals.
•
DH-485 terminal ports
•
Connecting to a single SLC controller (Point-to-point)
•
Connecting to a DH-485 network
•
Connecting a computer
•
Connecting a Hand-held terminal
TIP
For PanelView 300 Micro terminals, refer to page 218.
DH-485 Terminal Ports (RJ45)
DH-485 PanelView terminals with catalog numbers ending in 2 have two DH-485 ports. Terminals with catalog numbers ending in 3 also have an RS-232 printer port.
Use the DH-485 communication port to:
• communicate with a single or multiple SLC controllers over a
DH-485 network.
Use the DH-485 SLC Programming connector to:
• upload/download PanelView applications.
• monitor SLC operation, enter/modify SLC programs, test network devices.
Use the RS-232 Printer port to:
• connect a printer that supports the IBM enhanced character set.
For details on connecting to the RS-232 port, see the last section in this chapter.
192 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
The DH-485 communication port and programming connector may appear in different locations on specific terminals. Identify the ports by their size and shape or by the port labels.
DH-485
Communication Port
RS-232 Printer
DH-485 SLC
Programming Port
Port
DH-485 SLC
Programming Port
RS-232 Printer Port
DH-485
Communication Port
Connecting to a Single SLC Controller (Point-to-point)
To connect a DH-485 terminal to a single SLC controller use one of these cables:
•
0.3 m (1 ft) Cat. No. 1747-C11
•
1.83 m (6 ft) Cat. No. 1747-C10
•
6.1 m (20 ft) Cat. No. 1747-C20
PanelView 1000
SLC
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
SLC 500 Communication Connector
DH-485 Communication Port
Pin 1
Pin 8
Cable, Catalog No. 1747-C10
Cable, Catalog No. 1747-C11
Cable, Catalog No. 1747-C20
Pin 1
Pin 8
Side shown is opposite latch
To SLC Communication Connector
8-pin, Male, Modular Plug
To PanelView Terminal 8-pin
Female Plug
Pin #
Connection Diagram
Connect to:
Pin #
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
8
193
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
The DH-485 connectors are not electrically isolated. If electrical isolation is required, use Link Couplers (Cat. No. 1747-AIC) as shown on next page.
ATTENTION
Electrical isolation using Link Couplers (Cat. No. 1747-AIC) is required where the distance between the PanelView terminal and the SLC is greater than 6.1 m (20 ft).
Connecting to a DH-485 Network
This section shows how to connect a DH-485 terminal to multiple SLC controllers on a DH-485 network through the AIC Link Coupler.
TIP
For PanelView 300 Micro terminals, refer to page 218.
Link Coupler Catalog
No. 1747-AIC
SLC
Power Source or 1747-NP1
Belden 9842
Cable
Catalog No. 1747-C10
Catalog No. 1747-C11
Catalog No. 1747-C20
PanelView 1000
SLC 5/01
194
IMPORTANT
The DH-485 network cable requires proper shielding, grounding and termination. Refer to Data Highway / Data Highway Plus /
Data Highway-485 Cable Installation Manual, publication
1770-6.2.2).
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
The illustration below shows how to connect a DH-485 terminal to a
MicroLogix or SLC controller using the AIC+ Link Coupler (Cat. No.
1761-NET-AIC).
PanelView 1000
PanelView 1000
To PanelView
Do not connect the PanelView to Port 3 of the AIC+ when Port
3 is networked to other devices.
AIC+
1761-NET-AIC
Cable Cat. No.
1761-CBL-AS03 Cat. No.
1761-CBL-AS09
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, 1500LSP
Cat. No.
1761-CBL-HM02
1761-CBL-AM00
SLC 5/03, 5/04, 5/05
AIC+
1761-NET-AIC
Cable
Cat. No. 1761-CBL-AS03
Channel 0 Port
Cat. No. 1747-CP3
To 24V DC Power
AIC
1747-AIC
AIC+
1761-NET-AIC MicroLogix 1000, 1200, 1500LSP
Belden 9842
Cat. No.
1761-CBL-HM02
1761-CBL-AM00
PanelView 1000
Cable Cat. No.
1747-C10 Cat. No.
1747-C11 Cat. No.
1747-C20
195
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
196
Connecting a Computer
On DH-485 terminals, PanelView applications are transferred:
• through the DH-485 programming connector to the terminal.
• through any node on a DH-485 network.
To connect a computer to the PanelView terminal, you need:
• a cable (same cables used to transfer applications from APS software to SLC)
– 0.3 m (1 ft) cable, Cat. No. 1747-C11
– 1.83 m (6 ft) cable, Cat. No. 1747-C10
– 6.1 m (20 ft) cable, Cat. No. 1747-C20
•
Personal Computer Interface Converter (PIC), Cat. No. 1747-PIC.
The PIC connects to the computer. The cable connects the PIC to the DH-485 programming connector.
Personal Computer Interface Converter (PIC)
The Personal Computer Interface Converter (PIC) receives power from a controller through DH-485 connections. When connecting a computer directly to a PanelView terminal without a controller connected, you need to use a power supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1). The power supply connects to the DH-485 communication connector with the same cables used to connect an SLC.
IMPORTANT
The terminal must be connected to an SLC, DH-485 network, or power supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1). This connection provides power to the PIC.
Connecting Earth Ground to PanelView Terminals
When using the 1747-PIC converter with the PV600, PV900, PV1000 color, and PV1000 grayscale terminals, you must connect the Earth
Ground terminal on the back of the terminal to Earth Ground.
Connect the Earth Ground terminal using 14-gauge, stranded wire no longer than 1 meter (40 inches).
Earth Ground Terminal
PV900 Color Terminal
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Connecting a Computer to DH-485 Connector Using a Power Supply
PanelBuilder32
PanelView 1000
Wallmount Power Supply
Cat. No. 1747-NP1
25-pin to 9-pin
Adapter (if required)
Personal Computer
Interface Converter
(Cat. No. 1747-PIC)
To DH-485
Programming Connector
To DH-485
Communication Port
Cable Cat. No.
1747-C10 Cat. No.
1747-C11 Cat. No.
1747-C20
Connecting a Computer to DH-485 Connector Using a DH-485 Powered Device
PanelBuilder32
PanelView 1000
To DH-485 Programming
Connector
To DH-485
Communication Port
SLC 500 or DH-485
Network
25-pin to 9-pin
Adapter (if required)
Personal Computer
Interface Converter
(Cat. No. 1747-PIC)
TIP
Cable Cat. No.
1747-C10 Cat. No.
1747-C11 Cat. No.
1747-C20
The computer can connect to any node on the network. It is not necessary to directly connect the computer to the PanelView terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 197
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Connecting a Hand-held Terminal
To connect a Hand-held Terminal (HHT) to the PanelView terminal, use cable Cat. No. 1747-C10. One end of the cable connects to the
HHT connector and the other end connects to the DH-485 programming connector on the terminal. All power is supplied to the
HHT through the cable.
IMPORTANT
The PanelView terminal must be connected to an SLC, DH-485 network, or power supply. This connection provides power for the HHT.
Hand-Held Terminal
Catalog No. 1747-PT1
PanelView 1000
To DH-485 Programming
Connector
DH-485 Communication Port Must be connected to an SLC, DH-485 network, or wallmount power supply (Cat. No. 1747-NP1) to provide power for the HHT.
Cable, 2 m (6 ft) Cat. No. 1747-C10
198 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
RS-232 (DH-485) Terminal
Connections
This section describes connections for the RS-232 (DH-485) PanelView terminals including:
•
RS-232 ports
• connecting to a SLC, CompactLogix, or MicroLogix Controller
(point-to-point)
• connecting to a MicroLogix Controller through the AIC+ module
• connecting a computer
• connecting to a DH-485 link
Refer to page 218 for PanelView 300 Micro RS-232 connections.
RS-232 Terminal Ports
RS-232 (DH-485) PanelView terminals with catalog numbers ending in
5 have a single RS-232 communication port. Terminals with catalog numbers ending in 9 also have an RS-232 printer port.
Use the RS-232 communication port to:
• communicate with a single SLC 5/03, 5/04 or 5/05 controller
(Channel 0 port) or MicroLogix 1000, 1200 or 1500 controller using point-to-point communication
• download/upload PanelView applications
Use the RS-232 printer port to:
• connect a printer that supports the IBM enhanced character set.
For connection details, see the last section in this chapter.
The RS-232 communication port and the printer port are reversed on the PanelView 550 touch screen terminals.
PanelView 550 Terminal PanelView 1000 Terminal
RS-232 Printer Port RS-232 Communication Port
RS-232 Printer Port RS-232 Communication Port
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 199
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
PanelView 1000 Terminal
200
Connecting to an SLC, CompactLogix, MicroLogix Controller
(Point-to-point)
This section shows how to connect a CompactLogix, MicroLogix
1500LRP, or SLC controller (SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05) to the
RS-232 PanelView terminal for point-to-point (DH-485) communication. On terminals with two ports, use the RS-232 communication port.
For the SLC, CompactLogix or MicroLogix 1500LRP controller, use one of these cables:
•
5 m (16.4 ft) Cat. No. 2711-NC13
•
10 m (32.7 ft) Cat. No. 2711-NC14
•
3 m (10 ft) Cat. No. 2706-NC13
SLC 5/03, 5/04, 5/05
5
9 6
1
To PanelView Terminal 9-pin,
Male, D-Shell Connector
Cable, Cat. No. 2711-NC13
Cable, Cat. No. 2711-NC14
Cable, Cat. No. 2706-NC13
5
9 6
1
To SLC 5/03, 5/04, 5/05, Compact
Logix or MicroLogix 1500LRP Channel
0 Port 9-pin, Male, D-Shell Connector
Pin #
Required
Data Out (TXD)
Data In (RXD)
Signal Common
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
Pin #
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
Data In (RXD)
Data Out (TXD)
Signal Common
CompactLogix
MicroLogix 1500LRP
IMPORTANT
You must configure the Channel 0 Port of the SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05 controller for DH-485 communication using the Resolutes 500 or AI500 software.
For the MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, or MicroLogix 1500LSP controller, use one of these cables:
•
5 m (16.4 ft) Cat. No. 2711-NC21
•
15 m (49 ft) Cat. No. 2711-NC22
PanelView 1000 Terminal
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, 1500LSP
Cable, Cat. No. 2711-NC21
Cable, Cat. No. 2711-NC22
(null modem not required)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Connecting to a MicroLogix Controller through an AIC+ Module
This section shows how to connect the RS-232 (DH-485) version of the PanelView terminal to a MicroLogix controller through an AIC+
Link Coupler.
AIC+ Cat. No.
1761-NET-AIC
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, 1500LSP
Belden Cable 9842
Catalog No.
1761-CBL-HM02
1761-CBL-AM00
Catalog No. 1747-CP3
PanelView 1000
RS-232 Communication Cables Cable,
Cat. No. 2711-NC13 Cable, Cat. No.
2711-NC14 Cable, Cat. No. 2706-NC13
Computer
Note: On PanelView 550 terminals, pin
8 on the RS-232 connector is pulled high. Do not use the 2711-NC13 cable.
Connecting a Computer
This section shows how to connect a computer to the RS-232
(DH-485) PanelView terminal for transferring applications.
PanelView 1000
Computer
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
To Comm1 or Comm2 Port
25-pin to 9-pin
Adapter (if required)
RS-232 Communication Cables Cat.
No. 2711-NC13, 5 m (16.4 ft) Cat.
No. 2711-NC14, 10 m (32.7 ft) Cat.
No. 2706-NC13, 3 m (10 ft)
To RS-232
Communication Port
201
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Connecting a DH+ to DH-485 Pass-through Link
This section shows connections for transferring applications between a computer on the Allen-Bradley DH+ link and an RS-232 (DH-485)
PanelView terminal, through an SLC 5/04 controller.
The RS-232 (DH-485) communication port on the terminal connects to the CH0 port of the controller using one of the cables listed below.
Computer with PanelBuilder32
PanelView 1000
To 1784-KT/B Port
DH+ Network Cable
Catalog No. 1784-CP6 or
Catalog No. 1784-CP with 1784-CP7 Adapter
SLC 5/04 Processor
To RS-232 Communication Port
Cable Catalog No.
2706-NC13, 2711-NC13,
2711-NC14
To CH1 Port
To CH0 Port
RS-232 (DF1) Terminal
Connections
This section describes connections for the RS-232 (DF1) versions of the PanelView terminal including:
• compatible controllers
•
RS-232 terminal ports
• connecting to a controller (point-to-point)
• using a modem
• connecting to a DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP network
TIP
For PanelView 300 Micro terminals, refer to page 218.
202 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Compatible Controllers
The RS-232 (DF1) terminals support full duplex communication with the following controllers.
•
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, 1500 controllers via the communication port.
•
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix controller via RS-232 port
•
SLC, PLC or MicroLogix 1000, 1200 or 1500 controllers via
1761-Net-DNI modules (for DeviceNet Network).
•
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 controllers via Channel 0/DF1 port.
•
PLC-5/10, PLC-5/12, PLC-5/15, or PLC-5/25 controllers via bridge such as the 1770-KF2, or 1785-KE.
•
Enhanced PLC-5 controllers (for example, PLC-5/11, PLC-5/20,
PLC-5/20C, PLC-5/20E) via Channel 0/DF1 port.
RS-232 (DF1) Terminal Ports
The RS-232 (DF1) PanelView terminals, with catalog numbers ending in 17, have a single RS-232 communication port supporting DF1 (Full
Duplex) communication port. PanelView terminals with catalog numbers ending in 16 also have an RS-232 printer/file transfer port.
•
Use the DF1 port to communicate with a logic controller using
DF1 full duplex communication.
•
Use the RS-232 printer/file transfer port to transfer applications between a computer and the terminal or to connect a printer.
For connection details, see the last section in this chapter.
PanelView 1000 shown
Note: The PanelView 300 has one DF1 port which is used for communication and transferring applications.
DF1 Port RS-232 File Transfer/Printer Port
203
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
RS-232/DF1 Port Connector
The DF1 port on the PanelView terminal is a 9-pin, male, RS-232 connector. The table below shows the pinout descriptions for this port and how these pins map to the DF1 ports on the controllers.
SLC
9-pin
PLC
25-pin
MicroLogix/
DNI 8-pin DIN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DF1 Port
9-pin DCE
1
2
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
7
2
The maximum cable length for DF1/full duplex communication is
15.24 m (50 ft).
Connecting to a MicroLogix 1000 Controller
The following shows a point-to-point connection between the RS-232
(DF1) port of the PanelView terminal and a MicroLogix 1000 controller.
PanelView
Cables:
2711-NC21
2711-NC22
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, 1500LSP
DF1 Port
Use a direct connection when both the PanelView and MicroLogix use the same power supply. Otherwise, use the AIC for electrical isolation as shown to the right.
PanelView
DF1 Port
2711-NC13, -NC14 Cable
AIC+
1761-NET-AIC
DF1 Port
1761-CBL-HM02
MicroLogix 1000
The 1761-NET-AIC module is used only with the MicroLogix controller and eliminates grounding level differences between the controller and
PanelView terminal.
204 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Connecting to an SLC, PLC, or MicroLogix 1500LRP Controller
The following shows a point-to-point connection between the DF1 port of the PanelView terminal and an SLC or PLC controller.
PanelView
SLC 5/03, 5/04, 5/05
MicroLogix
1500LRP
DF1 Port
2711-NC13, -NC14 Cable DF1 Port
2711-NC13, -NC14 Cable
9 to 25-Pin
Adapter
DF1 Port
PLC 5
Use an optical isolator or equivalent when grounding level differences exist between the controller or modem and the PanelView.
Connecting to a CompactLogix or FlexLogix
The following shows a point-to-point connection between the DF1 port of the PanelView and a CompactLogix or FlexLogix controller.
PanelView CompactLogix
DF1 Port
DF1 Port
2711-NC13, -NC14 Cable
FlexLogix
DF1 Port
205
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
DF1 PanelView
DF1 port
2711-NC22 or -NC22
Using a Modem
Wire or radio modem communication is possible between a DF1 terminal and controller. Each modem must support full duplex communication. Refer to your modem user manual for details on settings and configuration.
PanelView
DF1 Port
Modem
Optical Isolator
Controller
Modem
Connecting to a DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP Network
The following illustration shows a DF1 PanelView terminal connected to a single controller (MicroLogix, SLC or PLC) on:
•
a DeviceNet network via 1761-NET-DNI modules or
•
an EtherNet/IP network via 1761-NET-ENI modules
MicroLogix 1000
1761-NET-DNI Module for DeviceNet
1761-NET-ENI Module for EtherNet/IP DF1
1761-CBL-HM02
DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP
1761-CBL-PM02 or
SLC 5/03, 5/04, 5/05
DF1
24V DC Power Supply
2755-PW46
The SLC or PLC requires the PM02 cable. Only a single processor can be connected.
DF1 or
PLC 5/40C
206 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Constructing a Null Modem Cable
To construct a null modem cable, refer to the following pinout:
6
8
1
4
7
2
5
3
9-pin
6
5
8
20
4
2
7
3
25-pin 9-pin
3
2
5
1
4
6
8
7
ControlNet Connections
This section describes connections for the ControlNet PanelView terminals including:
•
ControlNet Protocol
•
Compatible ControlNet Controllers
•
ControlNet ports on the PanelView terminal
•
Typical ControlNet network
•
Making ControlNet connections
Related Information
For more information on ControlNet products, refer to the following publications.
•
ControlNet System Overview, publication NETS-SG001
•
ControlNet System Planning and Installation Manual, publication
CNET-IN002
•
ControlNet Cable System Component List, publication AG-PA002
The Allen-Bradley website (www.ab.com) provides information and product descriptions of ControlNet products. Under the Products and
Services heading, select Communication.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 207
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
208
ControlNet Protocol
The PanelView terminal supports release 1.5 of ControlNet. Scheduled and Unscheduled PLC-5C and ControlLogix messaging. Redundant cabling is supported.
ControlNet allows a flexible control architecture that can work with multiple processors and up to 99 nodes (via taps) anywhere along the trunk cable of the network. There is no minimum tap separation and you can access the ControlNet network from every node (including adapters).
Compatible ControlNet Controllers
The ControlNet PanelView terminal communicates with a PLC-5C
(using PCCC commands) or a ControlLogix processor (using CIP protocol) using unscheduled and scheduled messaging. The following controllers are supported:
•
ControlLogix using 1756-CNB module
•
PLC-5/20C, PLC-5/40C, PLC-5/60C, PLC-5/80C
ControlNet Terminal Ports
ControlNet versions of the PanelView terminal (catalog numbers ending in 15) have a ControlNet communication port and an RS-232 serial port.
•
Use the ControlNet port to connect to devices on a ControlNet network and transfer applications over a ControlNet network.
•
Use the RS-232 port to transfer applications between a computer and the terminal using a direct connection or to connect a printer.
For details on connecting to the RS-232 port, see the last section in this chapter.
PanelView 1000
ControlNet
Communication Port
RS-232 Port
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Typical ControlNet Network
Below is a typical ControlNet network with a PanelView terminal installed on a network drop.
PanelView 1000
Personal
Computer
Serial Link
1770-KFC
ControlNet Port BNC
Coaxial Cable
PLC-5/40C
RS-232 Port
Computer for developing
PanelView applications
Serial Link
Printer
OR
1784-KTC(X) Card to
ControlNet (RSLinx) & WinPFT
ControlLogix 5550
1756-CNB Module
Personal
Computer
1784-KTC(X)
Interface Card
1786-RG6 Cable
PLC-5/80C
Flex I/O
(1784-ACN)
= Taps
= Terminators
Repeater
(1786-RPT)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 209
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Making ControlNet Connections
Use the pinout information below to connect the PanelView to a
ControlNet network.
IMPORTANT
Follow the ControlNet network layout and design as specified in the ControlNet Cable System Planning and Installation
Manual, publication CNET-IN002.
Redundant BNC Cable Connectors
NAP Connector
6
7
4
5
2
3
Pin #
1
8
Shell
NAP Signal
Signal Common
No Connection
TX_H
TX_L
RX_L
RX_H
No Connection
Signal Common
Earth Ground
Channel B
Channel A
Pin 1
210 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
NAP and Redundant Cables
ControlNet cables, taps, connectors. Refer to the ControlNet Cable
System Planning and Installation manual, publication CNET-IN002 for descriptions of these components. For information on purchasing these items, refer to the Allen-Bradley ControlNet Cable System
Component List, publication AG-PA002.
Item
RG-6 quad-shield
Coax repeater
Coax taps
Network access cable
Coax tool kit
Segment terminators
BNC connectors
Catalog Number
1786-RG6
1786-RPT, -RPTD
1786-TPR, -TPS, -TPYR, -TPYS
1786-CP
1786-CTK
1786-XT
1786-BNC, -BNCJ, -BNCP, -BNCJ1
IMPORTANT
Do not connect to a network using both the redundant cable
BNC connector and the Network Access Port (NAP).
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 211
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
DeviceNet Network
Terminal Connections
This section describes connections for the DeviceNet PanelView terminals including:
•
DeviceNet connectors
• connections
• typical DeviceNet network
DeviceNet Terminal Ports
The DeviceNet versions of the PanelView terminals (catalog numbers ending in 10) have a DeviceNet port and an RS-232 serial port.
•
Use the DeviceNet port to connect to devices on a DeviceNet network or transfer applications over a DeviceNet network.
•
Use the RS-232 port to transfer applications between a computer and the terminal using a direct connection or to connect a printer.
For details on connecting to the RS-232 port, see the last section in this chapter.
PanelView 1000
DeviceNet Port RS-232 Port
212 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Making DeviceNet Connections
Use one of the cables below to connect the DeviceNet version of the
PanelView terminal to a DeviceNet network.
Cable
DeviceNet Cable, 50 m (164 ft)
DeviceNet Cable, 100 m (328 ft)
DeviceNet Cable, 150 m (492 ft)
Publication No.
1485C-P1A50
1485C-P1A150
1485C-P1A300
IMPORTANT
Refer to DeviceNet Cable System Planning and Installation manual, publication DNET-UM072 for network layout and design information
DeviceNet
Terminal Block
1
5
Terminal Signal Function
3
4
1
2
5
COM
CAN_L
SHIELD
CAN_H
V DC+
Common
Signal Low
Shield
Signal High
Power Supply
Color
Black
Blue
Uninsulated
White
Red
213
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Typical DeviceNet Network
Below is a typical DeviceNet network with PanelView terminals installed on 2 of the network drops.
A DeviceNet network requires a 24V DC power supply. DeviceNet power consumption is 24…90 mA @24V DC. The PanelView terminal does not receive its power from the network.
PLC-5
SLC 5/04 or
DeviceNet Scanner
Module (Cat. No.
1747-SDN)
PanelView
PanelView
DeviceNet Scanner
Module (Cat. No.
1771-SDN)
DeviceNet Port
1770-KFD
Module
DeviceNet Port
Serial Link
RS-232 Port
Computer for developing
PanelView applications
Download/
Upload
RediSTATION
Drive
SM
C
Smart Motor Controller
214 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
EtherNet/IP Connections
The EtherNet/IP PanelView terminal can communicate on an EtherNet
TCP/IP network with the following devices:
•
PLC-5E or PLC-5 with 1761-NET-ENI or 1785-ENET module
•
SLC-5/05 or SLC with 1761-NET-ENI module
•
ControlLogix controller with 1756-ENET/B or 1761-NET-ENI module
•
MicroLogix, CompactLogix, or FlexLogix with 1761-NET-ENI module
•
Another EtherNet/IP PanelView terminal
•
Any device that can process CIP messages
The PanelView terminal supports access to multiple ControlLogix controllers through:
• a single 1756-ENET/B module in a single 1756-I/O rack.
• multiple 1756-ENET/B modules in a single 1756-I/O rack.
• multiple 1756-ENET/B modules in multiple 1756-I/O racks.
EtherNet/IP Terminal Ports
The EtherNet/IP versions of the PanelView terminals (catalog numbers ending in 20) have an Ethernet RJ45 communication port and an
RS-232 serial port.
•
Use the RJ45 port to communicate with a logic controller on an
EtherNet/IP network and transfer applications over an
EtherNet/IP network.
•
Use the RS-232 serial port to transfer applications between a computer and the terminal using a direct connection or to connect a printer. For connection details, see the last section in this chapter.
PanelView 1000 shown
Ethernet Connector
RS-232 File Transfer/Printer Port
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 215
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
Ethernet Connector
The Ethernet connector is an RJ45, 10/100Base-T connector. This is the pinout for the connector.
Pin Pin
RJ45
Connector
8
1
6
7
4
5
8
1
2
3
NC
NC
RD-
NC
NC
Pin Name
TD+
TD-
RD+
When to use a straight-through and cross-over pin-out:
•
Direct point-to-point 10/100Base-T cables, with cross over pin-out (1-3, 2-6, 3-1, 6-2), connect the PanelView Ethernet port directly to another SLC 5/05 Ethernet port (or a computer
10/100Base-T port).
Cables
Category 5 shielded and unshielded twisted-pair cables with RJ45 connectors are supported. The maximum cable length between the
PanelView Ethernet port and a 10/100Base-T port on an Ethernet hub
(without repeaters or fiber) is 100 m (328 ft). However, in an industrial application, the cable length should be kept to a minimum.
ATTENTION
If you connect or disconnect the Ethernet cable with power applied to the PanelView or any device on the network, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.
216 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
1756-ENET/B
10.0.0.2
Hub
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Typical EtherNet/IP Configuration
The following illustration shows a ControlLogix Controller (with
1756-ENET/B modules), a PLC-5E controller, SLC 5/05, a
MicroLogix/CompactLogix/FlexLogix (with 1761-NET-ENI module), and an Ethernet PanelView terminal connected to an EtherNet/IP network. Note that each node has a unique IP address.
PLC-5E Controller SLC 5/05
MicroLogix, FlexLogix, or CompactLogix with 1761-NET-ENI Module
10.0.0.5
ControlLogix 5550 Controller
10.0.0.3
Ethernet Cable
10.0.0.4
PanelView Terminal
Ethernet Port
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 217
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
PanelView 300 Micro
Terminal Connections
This section describes how to connect the PanelView 300 Micro terminal. Refer to the following topics in this section:
•
RS-232 communication port
•
Connecting to a MicroLogix Controller
•
Connecting to a SLC, PLC-5, ControlLogix, MicroLogix,
CompactLogix, or FlexLogix Controller
•
Connecting to a DH-485 Network
•
Connecting to a DeviceNet Network
•
Connecting to a personal computer
RS-232 Communication Port
The PanelView 300 Micro terminal (catalog numbers ending in 18 and
19) has a single RS-232 communication port (8-pin mini DIN).
PanelView 300 Micro
RS-232 Communication Port
2 1
5
4
3
8 7 6
Pin #
1 NC (No Connection)
2 GND
3 RTS
4 RXD
5 NC (No Connection)
6 CTS
7 TXD
8 GND
PanelView 300 Micro
Connecting to a MicroLogix Controller
Directly connect the PanelView 300 Micro terminal to a MicroLogix
1000/1200/1500 controller using the following cables. Use DH-485 or
DF1 protocols for communication.
1761-CBL-HM02
2711-CBL-HMxx
MicroLogix 1000 Shown
218
1761-CBL-AM00
RS-232 Communication Port
2 1
5
4
3
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-AM00, Series C (.5 m, 1.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-HM02, Series C (2 m, 6.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-HM05, Series C (5 m, 15 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-HM10, Series C (10 m, 30 ft)
8 7 6
Cable Connector
Pin #
24V
GND
RTS
CTS
DCD
RXD
TXD
3
6
1
2
5
4
GND
7
8
Cable Connector
Pin #
1 24V
2 GND
3 RTS
6 CTS
5 DCD
4 RXD
7 TXD
8 GND
5
4
2
RS-232 Comm Port
1
8 7 6
3
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Connecting to an SLC, PLC-5, ControlLogix, MicroLogix 1500LRP,
CompactLogix, or FlexLogix
Directly connect the PanelView 300 Micro terminal to an SLC, PLC-5
ControlLogix, MicroLogix 1500LRP, CompactLogix, or FlexLogix processor using the following cables. Use DH-485 (SLC only) or DF1 protocols for communication.
PanelView 300 Micro
ControlLogix Module
1761-CBL-PM02
2711-CBL-PMxx
1761-CBL-AP00
RS-232 Communication Port
8-Pin Mini-DIN
2 1
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-AP00, Series C (.5 m, 1.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-PM02, Series C (2 m, 6.5 ft)
5
4
3 Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-PM05, Series C (5 m, 15 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-PM10, Series C (10 m, 30 ft)
8 7 6 Cable Connector
Pin #
1 24V
2 GND
3 RTS
6 CTS
5 DCD
4 RXD
7 TXD
8 GND
Cable Connector
Pin #
1
2
7
8
9
5
3
4
6
RI
GND
RTS
CTS
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
DSR
SLC
RS-232 Connector
9-Pin D-Shell
5
9 6
1
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 219
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
220
PanelView 300 Micro
Connecting to an Advanced Interface Converter
DH-485 versions of the PanelView 300 Micro can operate on a DH-485 network through an Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) module.
Use the following cables.
AIC+
1761-CBL-PM02, 2711-CBL-PMxx
(to Port 1 of AIC+)
1761-CBL-HM02, 2711-CBL-HMxx
(to Port 2 of AIC+)
RS-232 Communication Port
2 1
5
4
8 7 6
3
1761-CBL-AP00
(to Port 1)
1761-CBL-AM00
(to Port 2)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-AM00, Series C (.5 m, 1.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-HM02, Series C (2 m, 6.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-HM05, Series C (5 m, 15 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-HM10, Series C (10 m, 30 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-AP00, Series C (.5 m, 1.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-PM02, Series C (2 m, 6.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-PM05, Series C (5 m, 15 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-PM10, Series C (10 m, 30 ft)
Refer to previous sections for cable diagrams.
5 1
9
Port 1
6
2
5
4
8 7 6
Port 2
1
3
Connecting to a DeviceNet Interface (DNI)
Operate the PanelView 300 Micro on a DeviceNet network using DF1 protocol through a point-to-point connection to a DNI module.
PanelView 300 Micro
1761-CBL-HM02
2711-CBL-HMxx
V±
CAN_L
NE T
SHIEL
D CAN_H
V+
MOD
NODE
GND
TX /RX
1761-CBL-AM00
RS-232 Communication Port
2 1
5
4
3
8 7 6
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-AM00, Series C (.5 m, 1.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-HM02, Series C (2 m, 6.5 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-HM05, Series C (5 m, 15 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-HM10, Series C (10 m, 30 ft)
Cable Connector
Pin #
24V
GND
RTS
CTS
DCD
RXD
TXD
GND
3
4
7
6
5
1
2
8
Cable Connector
Pin #
1 24V
2 GND
3 RTS
6 CTS
5 DCD
4 RXD
7 TXD
8 GND
5
4
2
RS-232 Comm Port
1
3
8 7 6
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Connecting to a Personal Computer (Application File Transfers)
Transfer applications between a computer and PV300 Micro terminal using one of the following cables.
PanelView 300 Micro
TIP
Applications for the PanelView 300 Micro terminal are developed using PanelBuilder32 Software (Catalog No.
2711-ND3, V3.60 or later).
Personal Computer
(Running PanelBuilder32)
1761-CBL-PM02
2711-CBL-PM05
2711-CBL-PM10
RS-232 Communication Port
2 1 Cable, Catalog No. 1761-CBL-PM02, Series C (2 m, 6.5 ft)
5 3
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-PM05, Series C (5 m, 15 ft)
Cable, Catalog No. 2711-CBL-PM10, Series C (10 m, 30 ft)
4
8 7 6
Cable Connector
Pin #
24V
GND
RTS
1
2
3
CTS
DCD
RXD
TXD
GND
6
5
4
7
8
Cable Connector
Pin #
3
4
1
2
6
7
8
9
5
RI
GND
RTS
CTS
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
DSR
RS-232 Connector
5 1
9 6
Refer to the PanelBuilder32 software user manual for application download instructions. Here’s a short summary of the methods that can be used to transfer files to a PanelView 300 Micro terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 221
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
PanelBuilder32 Software
Supports the direct transfer of application files from PanelBuilder32 using an RS-232 link.
Windows PanelView File Transfer (WinPFT) Utility
Supports the direct transfer of PanelBuilder32 application files from
WinPFT over an RS-232 link. The WinPFT utility is included with the
PanelBuilder32 Software. RSLinx software may be required to transfer applications to the terminal for DH-485 and DF1 protocols.
This method is recommended for direct downloads to installed
PanelView 300 Micro terminals using a portable or laptop computer.
Windows CE Pocket PanelView File Transfer (PocketPFT) Utility
Supports the direct transfer of PanelBuilder32 application files from the PocketPFT software over an RS-232 link. The PocketPFT software and an RS232 cable is available from Rockwell Software as part of the
MaintenCE suite of tools. You will also need one of the recommended download cables.
This method is recommended for direct downloads to installed
PanelView 300 Micro terminals using an HPC JORNADA portable CE computer, available only from Rockwell Software.
IMPORTANT
After a successful download of an application, you may not be able to download another application. The downloaded application may have different communication settings than the settings in PanelBuilder32 software. Either change the terminal
settings using the Communication Setup screen (see page 72)
or the Application settings dialog in PanelBuilder 32 software.
222 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Terminal Connections Chapter 12
Connecting a Computer or
Printer to the Terminal
Most of the PanelView terminals have an RS-232 serial port to:
• download/upload applications over a serial link.
• connect a printer that supports the IBM enhanced character set.
PanelView terminals that don’t have an additional RS-232 Printer Port include the 300 Micro, the 300 (except for DeviceNet), and the -xxA2/
-xxA5 versions of the 550/600 and 900 monochrome terminals.
The illustration below shows how to make these connections.
Communication parameters for the RS-232 port are set on the Printer
Setup screen of the Configuration Mode menu.
Computer
PanelView 1000 DH+ Terminal
RS-232 Port
PanelView 550 DH+ Terminal
Available Cables
Cat. No. 2711-NC13, 5 m (16.4 ft)
Cat. No. 2711-NC14, 10 m (32.7 ft)
Cat. No. 2706-NC13, 3 m (10 ft)
25-pin to 9-pin
Adapter
(if required)
Printer
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
RS-232 Port
RS-232 Port
2
3
PV550 Printer Port (DCE) without Handshaking
9-pin male
RXD
TXD
COM
(pulled high to +12V)
NC
(pulled high to +12V)
7
8
9
5
6
3
4
PV600/900/1000/1400 Printer Port (DCE)
9-pin male
1
2
NC
RXD
TXD
NC
(pulled high to +12V)
NC
COM
RTS
CTS
Upload/Download or Printer Cable without Hardware Handshaking
PV550 Printer Port (DCE)
9-pin male
2
RXD
3
TXD
5 COM COM
Printer/Computer Port (DTE)
9-pin 25-pin
2
3
5
3
2
7
Printer/Computer Port (DTE) with Handshaking
9-pin female
1
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
DCD
RXD (Data Receive)
TXD (Data Transmit)
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 223
Chapter 12 Terminal Connections
224 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Chapter
13
Chapter Objectives
This chapter tells how to isolate and correct common operating problems and perform routine maintenance tasks.
•
Using required equipment
•
Using troubleshooting chart
•
Interpreting status indicators
•
Cleaning display window
•
Replacing clock module
•
Replacing backlight
TIP
You cannot access the PanelView 300 Micro terminal's internal components. The rear cover is not removable; do not attempt to remove the cover. The real-time clock battery and LCD display backlight are not replaceable.
Equipment Required
Use a voltmeter to verify that the correct power source is connected to the terminal. No other electronic diagnostic equipment is required for troubleshooting.
Use the Troubleshooting
Chart
The following pages provide a troubleshooting chart for the terminal.
This chart lists the most common operating problems, causes, and steps to correct them.
ATTENTION
The PanelView terminals contain hazardous voltages. Do not insert objects or let objects fall into the terminal through ventilation slots. Always disconnect power when checking wiring connections. Failure to take adequate precautions may result in electrical shock.
225 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 225
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting Chart
Problem Probable Causes
Terminal does not power up. Improper connection to power source.
Incorrect input voltage level.
The dc power wires reversed (dc terminals only).
Corrective Actions
Verify wiring and connections to power source.
Verify correct voltage is present at power terminals.
Make sure dc power positive and negative are connected to the proper terminals.
Verify power terminal block is snapped onto base of
PV300 Micro.
Application file will not download (first download).
Application file will not download (subsequent downloads).
No communication with
MicroLogix, ControlLogix,
SLC or PLC controller.
Power terminal block not fully seated (PV300 terminals only).
Communication cable disconnected.
Incorrect communication rate or communication settings.
Incorrect computer COM port selection.
Incorrect communication or communication rate settings.
Communication (COMM) fault.
Check communication cable type and connections.
Verify computer and terminal are set to same communication settings.
Verify correct COM port number in WinPFT or
PanelBuilder32 software.
Verify computer and terminal have same communication settings. Change settings in
Communication Setup screen of the terminal.
Check status of COMM Status.
Communication rates not set properly.
Verify cable connections using cable diagrams
Verify that terminal and controller are set at the same communication rate.
No communication with PLC but COMM Status is active.
No communication with computer.
Controller is not in run mode.
Terminal node and maximum node numbers are not set correctly.
PanelView is trying to communicate with a controller at a different address.
The inhibit bit is set as the default on the Channel
Status Screen in the PLC.
Communication (COMM) fault.
Place controller in run mode.
Verify node address settings.
Verify address of the controller.
Change setting of the inhibit bit.
Check status of COMM Status.
No SLC, network, or power supply connection at terminal’s DH-485 port.
Communication rates not set correctly.
Verify cable connections using cable diagrams
Personal Computer Interface Converter (PIC) receives power from DH-485 connection. Verify that the terminal is connected to an SLC, network, or
wallmount power supply as shown in Chapter 12.
Verify that terminal and computer are set at the correct communication rate.
Verify node number settings.
Terminal node and maximum node numbers are not set correctly.
Computer fault.
Communication driver not properly loaded.
Printer port is enabled.
Refer to user manual for computer.
Refer to RSLinx online help or manual.
Disable printing on the Printer Setup screen of the
Configuration Mode menu.
226 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Chapter 13
Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Clock Module Battery Low message is displayed.
Cannot transfer application from memory card.
Probable Causes
Internal parameters corrupt.
Clock module battery failure.
Cannot transfer application to memory card.
Invalid file format.
Memory card is not properly installed.
Memory card is write protected.
(1)
File currently exists on memory card.
(1)
Application file is too large, not enough space on memory card.
Invalid memory card format.
(1)
Screen objects do not function.
(1)
Application file name appears as ******* on
Terminal Info screen.
Area on color screen appears dark.
Screen objects are not visible.
Memory card is not properly installed.
Application is too large for terminal memory.
Data checksum is incorrect.
Data checksum is incorrect.
Application does not exist.
Terminal not communicating with controller.
Terminal in screen saver mode.
Application is invalid.
(1)
Application is unusable because of error.
One of the backlight tubes has burnt out.
Correct power is not applied.
Contrast or intensity is not set correctly.
Terminal is in screen saver mode.
PV550 backlight lamp is not on.
Terminal’s backlight is burnt out.
Corrective Actions
Reload application and cycle power to the terminal.
Replace clock module as described in instructions provided with clock module kit. For PanelView 300
Micro, clock module cannot be replaced.
Verify correct installation.
Reduce size of application file.
Check that memory card is properly seated.
Application may be corrupt.
Verify file format (.PVA) being transferred.
Verify correct installation.
Change memory card protection switch.
Erase and reformat card.
Reduce size of application file or erase/format memory card.
Replace or reformat memory card. If problem continues, try another card.
Check that card is installed correctly. If problem continues, try another card.
Check the Terminal Info screen to verify that an application exists.
Check status of COMM Status indicator. See problem No communication with SLC or PLC controller for more information.
Access Screen Setup from the terminal
Configuration Mode to check if terminal is in Screen
Saver Mode.
Download application and try again.
Download new application.
Replace color backlight.
Verify power connections.
Access Screen Setup on the Configuration Mode menu and adjust the contrast. On keypad terminals, press the left and right arrow keys simultaneously, then press [F9] or [F15].
Access Screen Setup on the Configuration Mode menu to see if terminal is set for screen saver mode.
Access Screen Setup on the Configuration Mode menu and turn on backlight.
Replace backlight.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 227
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Values do not update on display but appear as asterisks ****
Probable Causes
Terminal is not communicating with controller.
Corrective Actions
Check status of COMM Status indicator.
Refer to problem No communication with SLC or
PLC controller for more details.
Change the field width for the object.
Can’t enter Configuration
Mode when pressing Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously.
Value is invalid or exceeds the field width defined for the object.
Left and right arrow keys are assigned to screen objects in the terminal application.
(1)
Terminal displays a warning message with instructions if these errors occur.
Contact Allen-Bradley technical support for assistance.
228 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Chapter 13
Interpret Status Indicators
On PanelView terminals (except PanelView 300 Micro), use the
COMM and Fault Status indicators to isolate operating problems. The illustration below shows the location of these indicators on some terminals.
See Chapter 1 for status indicator locations on other terminals.
COMM Status Indicator
Fault Status Indicator
COMM
Status
Indicator
Fault
Status
Indicator
PV550 Back View
PV900 Back View
PV600/PV1000 is similar
On PanelView 300 Micro terminals, view the Comm and Fault indicators in the terminal configuration mode (Communication Setup selected).
DF1, DH-485, and DH+ Status Indications
Status
Indicator
Comm
Fault
(1)
This Pattern
Solid Fill
No Fill
Flashing
Blinking
No Fill
Solid
Blinking
Indicates
Normal operating state (no communication faults).
Fault detected.
•
Make sure controller is run mode
•
Verify baud settings of terminal and controller
•
Verify proper terminal to controller connections
When power is first applied (momentarily).
No communication established. For DF1 terminals, the Comm indicator flashes until an application is loaded.
Normal operating state
Fault detected. Cycle power to the terminal. If the fault still exists, the terminal requires servicing.
Hardware is functioning but no application is loaded or the current application is corrupt. Reload the application into the terminal.
(1)
Comm Status indicator stays on until powerup self-tests are complete.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 229
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Remote I/O Status Indications
Status
Indicator
Comm
(1)
Fault
This pattern
Solid Fill
No Fill
Blinking
Flashing
No Fill
Solid Fill
Blinking
Indicates
Normal operating state (no communication faults)
Communication not functioning
•
Verify that baud rate and rack settings match the PLC settings
•
Verify proper terminal to controller connections
•
Verify that the PLC enables remote I/O communication
No communication established. PLC is in program mode.
When power is first applied (momentarily)
Normal operating state
Fault detected. Cycle power to the terminal. If the fault still exists, the terminal requires servicing.
Hardware is functioning but no application is loaded or the current application is corrupt.
(1)
Comm Status indicator stays on until powerup self-test are complete
DeviceNet, ControlNet, and EtherNet/IP Network Indicators
Status
Indicator
Comm
This Pattern Indicates
Fault
Solid Fill
No Fill
Flashing
Blinking
Solid Fill
No Fill
Blinking
Normal operating state (no communication faults).
Hardware failed.
When power is first applied (momentarily).
No communication established.
Hardware failed.
Normal operating state (no communication faults).
Hardware is functioning but no application is loaded or the current application is corrupt.
230 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Chapter 13
Clean the Display Window
Follow these steps to clean the display window.
ATTENTION
Use of abrasive cleansers or solvents may damage the window.
Do not scrub or use brushes.
1. Disconnect power from the terminal at the power source.
2. Use a clean sponge or a soft cloth to clean the display with a mild soap or detergent.
3. Dry the display with a chamois or moist cellulose sponge to avoid water spots.
Remove Paint and Grease
Remove fresh paint splashes and grease before drying by rubbing lightly with isopropyl alcohol (70% concentration). Afterward, provide a final wash using a mild soap or detergent solution. Rinse with clean water.
Equipment Hose-downs
Be aware that screen objects on touch cell terminals may activate during equipment hose-downs.
ATTENTION
Because touch terminals have sensitive touch cell regions, it is possible for screen objects to activate during equipment hose-downs.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 231
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Replace the Clock Module
The real-time clock (RTC) module contains a lithium battery used only by the real-time clock. The battery is not used for application backup or input retention. The clock module has a typical life expectancy of seven years.
TIP
The real-time clock on the PanelView 300 Micro terminal is not replaceable.
The clock module replacement kits for the PanelView terminals are
listed on page 56 under Replacement Parts. Replacement instructions
are provided with the kits.
ATTENTION
The clock module contains lithium. Do not attempt to dispose of the module in a fire or incinerator. Doing so may cause the clock module to explode. Follow disposal regulations in your area for lithium battery disposal.
Replace the Backlight
Replacement backlights are available for the PanelView terminals.
See Replacement Parts on page 56 for the catalog numbers.
Replacement instructions are provided with the kits.
TIP
The backlight on the PanelView 300 and 300 Micro terminal, the PanelView 550 (series H and above) keypad and 550 (series
B) touch screen, and PanelView 600 touch screen is not replaceable.
ATTENTION
The PanelView 600 and PanelView 1000 LCD backlights contain mercury. At the end of its life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.
232 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Appendix
A
Specifications
PanelView 300 Micro
Terminal
Electrical
DC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
Mechanical
Enclosure
Weight
Dimensions mm inches
Installed Depth
Display
Type
Size
Pixels
Terminal Memory
Total Application Flash Memory
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating, nonoperating)
Vibration (operating)
11…30V DC (24V nominal), Class 2 Power Supply
2.5 W maximum (0.105A @24V DC)
NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only),
IP54, IP65
284 g (10 oz.)
133 (H) x 112 (W) x 48 (D)
5.23 (H) x 4.38 (W) x 1.87 (D)
35mm (1.39 in.)
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with integral
LED backlight (100,000 hour life)
73 mm (w) x 42 mm (h)
2.87 in. (w) x 1.67 in. (h)
128 x 64
240K bytes (application screens)
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-20…85
°
C (-4…188
°
F)
5…95% at 0…55
2.5 Watts (8.5 BTU/Hour)
30 g/50 g
2 g up to 2,000 Hz
°
C (32…131
°
F)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 233
Appendix A Specifications
Character Sizes (Pixel size = 0.48 x 0.48 mm)
Characters/Row Maximum Rows Size in Pixels width x height)
4 x 6
6 x 8
6 x 16
6 x 24
12 x 8
12 x 16
12 x 24
18 x 8
18 x 16
18 x 24
20
10
10
10
31
20
20
6
6
6
3
2
2
7
10
7
3
7
3
2
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
1.9 x 2.9
2.9 x 3.8
2.9 x 7.7
2.9 x 11.5
5.8 x 3.8
5.8 x 7.7
5.8 x 11.5
8.6 x 3.8
8.6 x 7.7
8.6 x 11.5
PanelView 300 Terminal
Electrical
DC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
Mechanical
Enclosure
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight
Dimensions mm in
Installed Depth
18…32V DC (24V DC nominal), Class 2 Power Supply
6 Watts (0.25 Amps at 24V DC)
NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only),
IP54, IP65
Green
Red
673 g (1.48 lb)
197 (H) x 140 (W) x 82 (D)
7.76 (H) x 5.53 (W) x 3.21 (D)
69 mm (2.73 in.)
122.4 mm (4.82 in.) with memory card retainer
216 mm (8.5 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
234 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Specifications Appendix A
Display
Type
Size
Pixels
Terminal Memory
Total Application Flash Memory
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with integral
LED backlight (100,000 hour life)
73 mm (w) x 42 mm (h)
2.87 in. (w) x 1.67 in. (h)
128 x 64
240K bytes (application screens)
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
Airborne Contaminants
(1)
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-25…85
°
C (-4…188
°
F)
5…95% at 0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
6 Watts (13 BTU/HR)
15 g/30 g
2 g up to 2,000 Hz
ANSI/ISA-S71.04-1985 severity level G3, reference EN60654-4:1998 Class 3
(1)
Only applicable to conformal coated products: 2711-K3A5L1K.
Character Sizes (Pixel size = 0.48 x 0.48 mm)
Size in Pixels width x height)
4 x 6
6 x 8
6 x 16
6 x 24
12 x 8
12 x 16
12 x 24
18 x 8
18 x 16
18 x 24
Characters/Row Maximum Rows
20
10
10
10
31
20
20
6
6
6
10
7
3
2
7
3
2
7
3
2
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
1.9 x 2.9
2.9 x 3.8
2.9 x 7.7
2.9 x 11.5
5.8 x 3.8
5.8 x 7.7
5.8 x 11.5
8.6 x 3.8
8.6 x 7.7
8.6 x 11.5
235
Appendix A Specifications
PanelView 550 Terminals
Electrical
DC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
Supply Voltage Limits (touch screen only)
Power Consumption (touch screen only)
AC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
18…30V DC (24V DC nominal)
18 W, max (0.75 A @ 24V DC)
18…32V DC (24V DC nominal)
18 W, max (0.75 A @ 24V DC)
85…264V AC, 47…63 Hz
45 VA maximum
Mechanical
Enclosure NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only),
IP54, IP65
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight
Keypad, Keypad & Touch
Touch Screen
Dimensions- Keypad, Keypad & Touch mm in
Green
Red
1.2 kg (2.7 lb)
.93 kg (2.1 lb)
Dimensions- Touch Screen mm in
152 (H) x 185 (W) x 82 (D)
6.00 (H) x 7.28 (W) x 3.20 (D)
Installed Depth- Keypad, Keypad & Touch 86 mm (3.39 in.)
118 mm (4.64 in.) with memory card retainer
207 mm (8.15 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
Installed Depth- Touch Screen
167 (H) x 266 (W) x 106 (D)
6.57 (H) x 10.47 (W) x 4.17 (D)
64 mm (2.54 in.)
109 mm (4.30 in.) with memory card retainer
188 mm (7.40 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
Display
Type
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
120 x 60 mm (4.75 x 2.38 in.)
256 x 128
128 (16 columns x 8 rows)
16 x 16 pixels
236 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Specifications Appendix A
Terminal Memory
PV550 (Series E or later) or
PV550T (Series A or later)
Total Application Flash Memory
PV550 (Prior to Series E)
Total Application Flash Memory
240K bytes (application screens)
112K bytes (application screens)
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-20…70
°
C (-4…158
°
F)
5…95% at 0…30
°
C (32…86
°
F)
5…75% at 31… 40
°
C (88…104
°
F)
5…50% at 41…55
°
C (106…131
°
F)
20 W (69 BTU/HR) for AC Power or
DC Power
30 g/50 g
2 g up to 2,000 Hz
Character Sizes (Pixel size = 0.47 x 0.47 mm)
Size in Pixels width x height)
6 x 8
6 x 16
6 x 24
12 x 8
12 x 16
12 x 24
18 x 8
18 x 16
18 x 24
Characters/Row Maximum Rows
13
40
20
13
40
20
13
40
20
16
16
16
8
8
8
5
5
5
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.2 x 3.2
3.8 x 5.6
3.8 x 8.4
7.6 x 2.8
7.6 x 5.6
7.6 x 8.4
11.2 x 2.8
11.2 x 5.6
11.2 x 8.4
237
Appendix A Specifications
PanelView 600 Color
Keypad and Touch
Terminals
238
Electrical
AC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
DC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
Mechanical
Enclosure
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight
Dimensions mm in
Installed Depth
Display
Type
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
Terminal Memory
Total Application Flash Memory
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (noncondensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/nonoperating)
Vibration (operating)
85…264V AC, 43…63 Hz
60 VA maximum
18…32V DC (24V DC nominal)
24 W max. (1.0A @ 24V DC)
NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only),
IP54, IP65
Green
Red
2 kg (4.4 lb)
192 (H) x 290 (W) x 116 (D)
7.55 (H) x 11.40 (W) x 4.57 (D)
99 mm (3.89 in.)
131 mm (5.14 in.) with memory card retainer
220 mm (8.65 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
Active Matrix Thin-Film Resistor (TFT) with
Cold Cathode Fluorescent (CCF) Backlight
115 x 86 mm (4.54 x 3.4 in.)
320 x 234
128 (16 columns x 8 rows)
20 x 29 pixels
240K bytes (application screens)
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-25…70
°
C (-13…158
°
F)
5…95% at 0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
32 Watts (107 BTU/HR) for AC or DC Power
15 g/30 g
2 g up to 2,000 Hz
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Specifications Appendix A
Character Sizes (Pixel size = 0.36 x 0.37 mm)
Characters/Row Maximum Rows Size in Pixels width x height)
6 x 9
8 x 16
8 x 24
16 x 24
24 x 32
32x 40
19
13
9
52
39
39
9
7
5
25
14
9
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.9 x 5.9
2.9 x 5.9
2.9 x 8.9
5.8 x 8.9
8.6 x 11.8
11.5 x 14.8
PanelView 600 Color
Touch Only Terminals
Electrical
DC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
Mechanical
Enclosure
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight
Dimensions mm in
Installed Depth
Display
Type
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
Backlight
18…32V DC (24V DC nominal)
24 W max (1.0A @ 24V DC)
NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only),
IP54, IP65
Green
Red
1 kg (2.3 lb)
152 (H) x 185 (W) x 96 (D)
6.00 (H) x 7.28 (W) x 3.80 (D)
79 mm (3.12 in.)
132 mm (5.21 in.) with memory card retainer
211 mm (8.30 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
Active Matrix TFT with Cold Cathode
Fluorescent (CCF) Backlight
115 x 87 mm (4.54 x 3.43 in.)
320 x 240
128 (16 columns x 8 rows)
20 x 30 pixels
50,000 hours, 1/2 life at 25 °C (77 °F)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 239
Appendix A Specifications
Terminal Memory
Total Application Flash Memory 240K bytes (application screens)
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
0…50
°
C (32…122
°
F)
-25…70
°
C (-13…158
°
F)
5…95% at 0…40
°
C (32…104
°
F)
17 W (577 BTU/HR)
15 g/30 g
2 g up to 2,000 Hz
Character Sizes (Pixel size = 0.35 x 0.35 mm)
Characters/Row Maximum Rows Size in Pixels width x height)
6 x 9
8 x 16
8 x 24
16 x 24
24 x 32
32x 40
19
13
9
52
39
39
9
7
5
25
14
9
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.1 x 3.1
2.8 x 5.6
2.8 x 8.4
5.6 x 8.4
8.4 x 11.1
11.1 x 13.9
PanelView 900
Monochrome and Color
(1)
Terminals
Electrical
AC Power - PV900M and PV900C
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
DC Power - PV900M
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
DC Power - PV900C
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
85…264V AC, 47…63 Hz
110 VA maximum
18…30 V DC (24V DC nominal)
58 W max (2.5 A @ 24V DC)
18…32 V DC (24V DC nominal)
50 W max (2.1 A @ 24V DC)
(1)
The PanelView 900 specifications are for reference only. PanelView 900 Terminals are n longer available. Contact your Rockwell Automation distributor for more information.
240 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Specifications Appendix A
Display
PV900M
Type
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
PV900C
Type
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
Mechanical
Enclosure NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only)
IP54, IP65
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight - PV900M
Keypad
Touch Screen
Weight - PV900C
Keypad
Touch Screen
Dimensions - PV900M/900C Keypad mm in
Dimensions - PV900M/900C Touch Screen mm in
Installed Depth - PV900M
Installed Depth - PV900C
Green
Red
3.14 kg (4.4 lb)
2.91 kg (6.4 lb)
3.18 kg (7.0 lb)
2.95 kg (6.5 lb)
249 (H) x 406 (W) x 112 (D)
9.80 (H) x 15.97 (W) x 4.40 (D)
249 (H) x 336 (W) x 112 (D)
9.80 (H) x 13.24 (W) x 4.40 (D)
97 mm (3.81 in.)
129 mm (5.06 in.) with memory card retainer
220 mm (8.65 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
99 mm (3.89 in.)
131 mm (5.14 in.) with memory card retainer
222 mm (8.73 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
AC Gas Plasma
210 x 131 mm (8.27 x 5.17 in.)
640 x 400
384 (24 columns x 16 rows)
26 x 25 pixels
Active Matrix Thin-Film Resistor (TFT) with
Cold Cathode Fluorescent (CCF) Backlight
171 x 130 mm (6.73 x 5.12 in.)
640 x 480
384 (24 columns x 16 rows)
26 x 30 pixels
241
Appendix A Specifications
Terminal Memory
PV900M (prior to Series E)
Total Application Flash Memory
PV900M (Series E, firmware 3.0 or later),
PV900C
Total Application Flash Memory
240K bytes (application screens)
1008K bytes (application screens)
Environment
PV900M
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
PV900C
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-25…70
°
C (-13…158
°
F)
5…85% at 0…30
°
C (32…86
°
F)
50 Watts (165 BTU/HR) for AC Power or DC
Power
15 g/30 g
1 g up to 2,000 Hz
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-25…70
°
C (-13…158
°
F)
5…95% at 0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
39 W (133 BTU/HR)
15 g/30 g
1 g up to 2,000 Hz
Character Sizes PV900M (Pixel size = 0.33 x 0.33 mm)
Size in Pixels width x height)
8 x 16
8 x 24
16 x 24
24 x 32
32x 40
Characters/Row Maximum Rows
79
79
39
26
19
24
16
16
12
9
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.6 x 5.3
2.6 x 7.9
5.3 x 7.9
7.9 x 10.6
10.6 x 13.2
242 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Specifications Appendix A
Character Sizes PV900C (Pixel size = 0.27 x 0.27 mm)
Characters/Row Maximum Rows Size in Pixels width x height)
8 x 16
8 x 24
16 x 24
24 x 32
32x 40
79
79
39
26
19
24
19
19
14
11
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.2 x 4.3
2.2 x 6.5
4.3 x 6.5
6.5 x 8.6
8.6 x 10.8
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 243
Appendix A Specifications
PanelView 1000 Color &
Grayscale
244
Electrical
AC Power - PV1000G and PV1000C
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
DC Power - PV1000G and PV1000C
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
85…264V AC, 47…63 Hz
55 VA maximum
18…32 V DC (24V DC nominal)
24 W max (1.0A @ 24V DC)
Mechanical
Enclosure NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only)
IP54, IP65
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight - PV1000G and PV1000C
Keypad
Touch
Dimensions-PV1000G/1000C Keypad mm in
Green
Red
3.06 kg (6.7 lb)
3.00 kg (6.6 lb)
282 (H) x 423 (W) x 112 (D)
11.11 (H) x 16.64 (W) x 4.40 (D)
Dimensions - PV1000G/1000C Touch Screen mm in
Installed Depth - PV1000G and PV1000C
282 (H) x 370 (W) x 112 (D)
11.11 (H) x 14.58 (W) x 4.40 (D)
97 mm (3.81 in.)
129 mm (5.06 in.) with memory card retainer
220 mm (8.65 in.) with memory card retainer and clearance to insert and remove memory card
Terminal Memory
Total Application Flash Memory
Display
PV1000G
Type
1008K bytes (application screens)
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
PV1000C
Type
Size
Active Matrix Thin-Film Resistor (TFT) with
Cold Cathode Fluorescent (CCF) Backlight
(4 shades of gray)
211 x 158 mm (8.3 x 6.2 in.)
640 x 480
384 (24 columns x 16 rows)
26 x 30 pixels
Active Matrix Thin-Film Resistor (TFT) with
Cold Cathode Fluorescent (CCF) Backlight
211 x 158 mm (8.3 x 6.2 in.)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Specifications Appendix A
Display
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
640 x 480
384 (24 columns x 16 rows)
26 x 30 pixels
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-25…70
°
C (-13…158
°
F)
5…95% at 0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
39 W (132 BTU/HR) for Grayscale and Color
15 g/30 g
2 g up to 2,000 Hz
Character Sizes PV1000G and 1000C (Pixel size = 0.33 x 0.33 mm)
Characters/Row Maximum Rows Size in Pixels width x height)
8 x 16
8 x 24
16 x 24
24 x 32
32x 40
79
79
39
26
19
24
19
19
14
11
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.2 x 5.3
2.6 x 7.9
5.3 x 7.9
7.9 x 10.6
10.6 x 13.2
PanelView 1400 Color
Electrical
AC Power
Supply Voltage Limits
Power Consumption
Mechanical
Enclosure
Status Indicators
COMM
Fault
Weight
Keypad
Touch Screen
85…264V AC, 43…63 Hz
200 VA maximum
NEMA Type 12/13, 4X (Indoor use only)
IP54, IP65
Green
Red
20.3 kg (44.75 lbs)
19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 245
Appendix A Specifications
246
Mechanical
Dimensions - PV1400 Keypad mm inches
Dimensions - PV1400 Touch Screen mm in
Installed Depth
355 (H) x 483 (W) x 394 (D)
13.97 (H) x 19.0 (W) x 15.53 (D)
355 (H) x 441 (W) x 394 (D)
13.97 (H) x 17.37 (W) x 15.53 (D)
370 mm (14.58 in.)
400 mm (15.75 in.) with clearance to insert and remove memory card
Terminal Memory
Total Application Flash Memory
Display
Type
Size
Pixels
Touch Cells
Touch Cell Size
1008K bytes (application screens)
Color CRT
255 x 191 mm (10.0 x 7.5 in.)
800 x 600
384 (24 columns x 16 rows)
33 x 37 pixels
Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Heat Dissipation
Shock (operating/non-operating)
Vibration (operating)
0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
-40…85
°
C (-40…185
°
F)
5…95% at 0…55
°
C (32…131
°
F)
78 W (264 BTU/HR)
15 g/30 g
1 g up to 2,000 Hz
Character Sizes PV1400 (Pixel size = 0.32 x 0.32 mm)
Size in Pixels width x height)
8 x 20
16 x 24
24 x 32
32 x 40
32 x 64
Characters/Row Maximum Rows
99
49
33
24
24
29
24
18
14
9
Dimensions in mm
Width x Height
2.5 x 6.4
5.1 x 7.6
7.6 x 10.2
10.2 x 12.7
10.2 x 20.4
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Communication
Specifications Appendix A
DH-485 Network
Communication Rate
Distance Maximum
DH+ Network
Communication Rate
Distance Maximum
RS-232 or DH-485 Point-to-Point
Communication Rates
Distance Maximum
Remote I/O
Communication Rates
DeviceNet
Communication Rates
ControlNet Network
Communication Rate
Distance Maximum
EtherNet/IP Network
Distance Maximum
DF1/Full Duplex Communication
Communication Rate
Distance Maximum
RS-232 Printer Port
Communication Rates
Parity
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Handshaking
1200, 2400, 9600, 19.2K
1219 m (4,000 ft)
57.6K, 115.2K, 230.4K
3048 m (10,000 ft)
1200, 2400, 9600, 19.2K
6.1 m (20 ft)
57.6K, 2,800 m (10,000 ft)
115.2K, 1,400 m (5,000 ft)
125K, 250K, 500K
5M
1,000 m (3,280 ft)
100 meters (328 feet)
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K
15.24 m (50 ft)
1200, 2400, 9600, 19.2K
None, Even, Odd
7 or 8
1 or 2
None, Software (XON, XOFF), Hardware
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 247
Appendix A Specifications
Agency Certifications
300
Micro x
300 550 600 900M
Emissions (Class A: Industrial)
EN50081-2:1993
Immunity (Industrial) EN61000-6-2:1999 x x x x x
Immunity (Industrial) EN50082-2:1995
(2)
Programmable Controllers Equipment
Requirements and Tests) EN61131 2:1995
Low Voltage Directive (Safety Sections of
EN61131-2)
UL508 x
UL1604 Class 1, Div 2, Groups A, B, C, D, T4 x x
(1) x x x x x x
(1) x x x x
(1)
(3) x x x x
(1) x x x x
(4)(5) x x x x
UL2279 (IEC79-15) Class 1, Zone 2, Groups
IIC, T4
CSA 22.2, No. 142
CSA 22.2, No. 213 Class 1, Div 2, Groups A,
B, C, D, T4
EU Batteries Directive, 2006/66/EC x x x x x x x x x
(4)(5) x x x x x x x
(1)
Meets standard as of April 2002.
(2)
This standard applies to products manufactured prior to April 2002.
(3)
Does not apply to 600 Touch Screen Only terminals
(4)
PV550 (Series H or later) or PV550 Touch Screen Only (Series B or later)
(5)
PV550 terminals (Series G or earlier) and PV550 Touch Screen (Series A) have a Temperature Code Rating of T2
900C x x
(1) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1000G 1000C 1400 x x
(1) x x x x
(1) x x x x
(1) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
248 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Appendix
B
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
This appendix lists:
• terminal messages and codes that may appear during terminal operation.
• description of self-test numbers.
Types of Terminal
Messages
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
The terminals have different messages to display.
Status Messages
Indicate the terminal is performing an operation that may limit access to the terminal, such as an application download or a communication problem. The message disappears when the terminal completes the operation or when the condition is satisfied.
Reminder Messages
Indicate a minor fault or mistake. Reminder messages appear when an invalid operation is attempted, such as entering an out-of-range value.
Pressing any key removes the message.
Warning Messages
Indicate the operation may produce undesirable results. You must respond to warning messages as indicated in the message.
Fault Messages
Indicate the terminal has detected a condition which prevents further operation. The current application will halt. The terminal must be reset (power cycled) to recover from this type of error.
249
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
General Terminal
Messages
Error Number Terminal
Messages
200-206, 300,
318-321, 328,
329, 331, 346,
347, 355, 356,
358, 367, 404,
411, 416, 417,
421-425,
447-449, 457,
459, 700, 1105,
1111, 1113, 1115,
1207-1211,
2002-2009, 2016,
2018, 2021, 2028 and 2029
A fault has occurred. Error =
X
208 Write to logic controller failed
Type
Minor Fault or
Terminal Fault
Comm Status
303
304
305
307
308
309-311
312
313
314
Meaning
A minor fault was detected that could impact terminal operation or a terminal fault was detected.
Recommended Action
Press any key to recover from a minor fault. For terminal faults, contact technical support with the error code.
Aborted.
File read access error
File write access error
File not supported
Timeout
Data corrupted.
Verify file and retry.
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder
Reminder
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder / File
Transfer Status
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Unknown device Reminder / File
Transfer Status
File too large
No Card Inserted
Reminder / File
Transfer Status
Reminder
Controller does not accept data from the terminal. Controller is not connected.
File is incompatible with the terminal’s firmware.
The terminal was waiting for the partner device in a file transfer, but the terminal timed out before the data or expected reply was received.
The data checksum failed in a file transfer.
Check connections (on remote I/O units). Verify that controller is in run mode and not busy. Verify that controller data files are not in use by other applications.
Try again.
The terminal received an abort command during a file transfer.
Error reading the source file from a source device.
Error writing source file.
Try again. If problem continues, contact technical support.
Try again. If problem continues, contact technical support.
Contact technical support to verify compatibility. File must be a .PVA file.
Check cable connections or data corruption with noise on cable. Verify that the computer was not reset. Try again.
Check electrical and cable connections. Try the file transfer again.
Verify the file type entered. Try again. Destination or source device is invalid for a read or write application transfer.
Reduce application size. See
Appendix A for terminal requirements. If copying to a card, check card space.
File too large to be transferred to the terminal. In a memory card transfer, the card does not have enough space.
Install a memory card and try again.
You tried to transfer data to/from a memory card but there is no card in the card slot.
250 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
Error Number Terminal
Messages
315
Type
Unformatted card Reminder
316
317
323
324
325
326
327
330
332
333
334
340
Write Protected
Card
File exists.
Cannot overwrite
No application on
PV terminal
Reminder / File
Transfer Status
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Unexpected card removal. Please disconnect card before removal.
Reminder / File
Transfer Status
Format erases entire card:
0 or F1 Abort
1 or F2 - Continue
Warning
Meaning Recommended Action
Memory card is unformatted, contains an unrecognizable format or is corrupt.
Reformat the card or replace it with a new card if corrupt. Try again.
A write command to the card failed because the card switch is in the protected mode.
See message 342. This message only occurs when the file cannot be renamed.
Select write mode by changing the switch on the top edge of the card.
Try again.
Change the file name or save to a new memory card.
You tried to load an application on a memory card but there is no application in the terminal.
View the Terminal Info screen to see if an application is loaded in the terminal.
Problem formatting the memory card.
Try a new memory card.
Check card status Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Unformatted card Reminder
No Card Inserted
No files
Write Protected
Card
Reminder / File
Transfer Status
No application on
PV terminal
File in use -
Request denied
Reminder
Reminder
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder
Memory card is unformatted, contains an unrecognizable format or is corrupt.
Reformat the card or replace it with a new card. Try again.
You tried to transfer data to/from a memory card but there is no card in the card slot.
You tried to transfer a file from the memory card but there are no files on the card.
Install a memory card and try again.
Use memory card containing application (.PVA) files.
A write command to the card failed because the card switch is in protected mode.
You tried to load an application on a memory card but there is no application in the terminal.
Select write mode by changing the switch on the top edge of the card.
Try again.
View the Terminal Info screen to see if an application is loaded in the terminal.
Attempt to format memory card containing a file used by the application. This usually occurs when an application requires a font file on the memory card.
Format the memory card on a computer or a PanelView terminal that does not have an application loaded.
You removed the memory card during normal operation and did not press the Disconnect button on the Memory
Card configuration screen.
Operator pressed [F4] Erase / Format
Card on the Memory Card configuration screen.
Press the Disconnect Card button to close the files on the card. When prompted, remove the card from the slot and then re-insert the card. Enter
Configuration Mode and press the
Run Mode button.
Enter appropriate response:
0 or F1 to abort
1 or F2 to continue
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 251
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
Error Number Terminal
Messages
341 Proceed with download?
0 or F1 -Abort
342
Type
Warning
1 or F2 - Continue
The PVA File exists.
Reminder / File
Transfer Status
361
364
0 or F1 -Abort
1 or F2 - Upload with new PVA filename
Value not in range
Closing Files...
Reminder
Status
365
366
392
393
394
395
396
415
Meaning
You pressed [F2], Restore From Card on the Memory Card configuration screen.
You pressed [F3], Save To Card on the
Memory Card configuration screen when the file exists on the card.
Recommended Action
Enter appropriate response:
0 or F1 to abort
1 or F2 to continue
Enter appropriate response:
0 or F1 to abort
1 or F2 to upload new PVA file.
Remove card... Reminder
Entered value is outside of valid range.
Terminal is preparing for removal of memory card.
You must remove the memory card for the terminal to continues operation.
Attempt to disconnect the memory card.
Enter a value within the valid range.
Wait for files to close before removing memory card.
Remove the memory card.
After memory card is disconnected it must be removed from card slot before the terminal will operate.
Card disconnection will require card removal to continue operation.
File not supported
Warning
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
File not supported
File not supported
File not supported
File not supported
Retained memory lost.
Presets were loaded.
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder/File
Transfer Status
Reminder
File is incompatible with the terminal type.
In PanelBuilder32, select the Setup tab on the Application Settings dialog and select the correct terminal type.
File is incompatible with the communication protocol of the terminal.
The battery backed memory was invalid during startup. The system defaulted to preset values instead of the last states.
In PanelBuilder32, select the Setup tab on the Application Settings dialog and make sure the protocol matches your terminal.
File is incompatible with the terminal’s firmware.
File is incompatible with the operator input type (keypad, touch or keypad and touch) of terminal.
In PanelBuilder32, click the Catalog &
Revisions button on the Setup tab on the Application Settings dialog.
Select a firmware version that matches your terminal.
In PanelBuilder32, select the Setup tab on the Application Settings dialog. Select the type of operator input that matches your terminal.
File is incompatible with the terminal. Download the file to the terminal again. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
No action necessary. Terminal reverts to defaults.
252 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
1125
1126
1127
Error Number Terminal
Messages
436
634
1109
1110
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
2005
2007 - 2010
Logic Controller has screen control
Read Fail or
Write Fail
Type
Reminder
Status
Font file unavailable,
Font error = ****
Minor Fault or
Terminal Fault
No valid application
Reminder
Access denied.
Status
Access denied.
Status
Status Security tampering.
No operator selected.
Status
Password change is not allowed.
Password change is not allowed.
New password must be entered before it can be verified.
Reminder
Reminder
Reminder
New and verify passwords differ.
Please verify new password.
Password changed
Application file:
Insufficient RAM
Application file contains errors
Status
Reminder
Reminder
Terminal Fault
Terminal Fault
Meaning Recommended Action
You tried to change the application screen but it is configured for controller only access.
ControlLogix Tag or address does not exist or is the wrong data type.
No action required, controller will change screens as programmed.
Check tag address.
Check for data type mismatch.
Designated slot does not contain a
ControlLogix Processor.
You downloaded an application to the
PanelView without the appropriate memory card (containing the font file) inserted in the card slot of the terminal.
Verify ControlLogix slot location.
From the Memory Card screen, press the Disconnect button to close the files on the card. Remove the card from the card slot. Locate the card containing the font file or copy the correct font file to a card. Insert the correct memory card in the card slot and enter Run mode.
Download application to terminal.
You tried to run an application that has not been downloaded to the terminal.
Wrong password entered.
Password not recognized
PVA file was corrupted - attempt to bypass security was detected
There is no currently selected operator, but a password change has been requested
Password is unchangeable
Enter a valid password.
Enter a valid password.
New application file must be downloaded to the terminal.
Select the operator requiring the new password.
Operator cannot change password
New pass words must be entered twice.
Password cannot be changed at the current level of security.
Current operator does not have access for password changes.
Enter the new password again to verify that it was entered correctly.
The same password was not entered for verification.
New pass words must be entered twice.
Password change is effective.
Application file may be too large.
Application contains incompatible data.
Enter the same password for New and Verify.
Enter the new password again.
You must use new password for security access.
Try again. If possible, reduce the size of the application.
Check application and try again.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 253
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
Error Number Terminal
Messages
2011 Retained memory lost. Presets were loaded.
Type
Reminder
2012
2014
2030, 2031
Application file:
Too many retained memory devices
Hardware configuration is corrupted
Hardware and firmware do not match
Terminal Fault
Terminal Fault
Terminal Fault
Meaning Recommended Action
The battery backed memory was invalid during startup. The system defaulted to preset values instead of the last states.
The battery-backed RAM is too full to hold all devices requiring presets.
No action necessary. Terminal reverts to defaults.
Reduce the number of control objects.
Use global objects.
The terminal hardware configuration is corrupt.
A mismatch exists between the terminal firmware and the terminal hardware.
Contact technical support.
Verify that the series and revision markings on the back of the terminal are compatible with the firmware.
DH-485 Terminal Messages
Error Number Terminal
Messages
612 No active node(s) found on network
613
615
Required network node(s) not found
Duplicate node address
616 Data errors on the link
Type
Comm Status
Comm Status
Comm Status
Comm Status
Meaning Recommended Action
Tag or address does not exist or is the wrong data type.
Tag or address does not exist or is the wrong data type.
More than one node was assigned the same address.
Corrupt data packets were detected on DH-485 network.
Check tag address.
Check for data type mismatch.
Check tag address.
Check for data type mismatch.
Verify all device nodes.
Verify controller addressing and baud rate settings. Check for loose or reversed wiring.
254 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
ControlNet Terminal Messages
See Terminal Codes for messages below
Error Number Terminal
Messages
Type
634
Meaning
PanelView offline Comm Warning PanelView is offline.
634 Write fail.
634
634
Write timeout.
Read fail.
Comm Warning PanelView is communicating with the controller. The data table address does not exist.
Comm Warning PanelView is not communicating with the logic controller.
Comm Warning PanelView is communicating with the controller. The data table address does not exist.
634 Read timeout.
Recommended Action
Check connections
Check / define data table address in the controller.
Check connections and node configuration in the application.
Check/define data table address in the controller.
636 Initial write failed.
Comm Warning PanelView is not communicating with the controller.
Reminder Write to Logic Controller on Startup was configured and on powerup, the
PanelView could not write initial values to a node's data table address.
or
Check/define data table address in the controller.
Check/define data table address in the controller.
Check communication connections and node configuration in the application.
Write to Logic Controller on Startup was not configured and the
PanelView was unable to write a controller. Note: The error is only displayed on the first write attempt.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 255
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
Remote I/O Terminal Messages
Error Number Terminal
Messages
661 Timeout - No
Block Transfer
Writes
662
Type
Comm Status
Timeout - No
Block Transfer
Reads
Comm Status
663 Timeout - No
Block Transfer
Requests
Comm Status
664
665
PLC in program mode
Comm Status
No PLC communication
Comm Status
666
667
Invalid Rack
Configuration
Remote I/O
Hardware Failed
Comm Status
Comm Status
Meaning Recommended Action
The PLC is communicating with the terminal, but the PanelView is not receiving BTW requests required by the application.
The PLC is communicating with the terminal, but the PanelView is not receiving BTR requests required by the application.
Check ladder logic for missing BTW instructions (instructions are not enabled) or addressing errors. Check for logic controller errors.
Check ladder logic for missing BTR instructions (instructions are not enabled) or addressing errors. Check for logic controller errors.
The PLC is communicating with the terminal, but the PanelView is not receiving BTR or BTW requests required by the application.
Check ladder logic for missing BTR or
BTW instructions (instructions are not enabled) or addressing errors. Check for logic controller errors.
Place the PLC in run mode to resume communication.
The PLC is offline (in Program Mode).
The COMM Status indicator on the
Configuration Mode menu is off.
The PLC is not communicating.
Possible causes are disconnected cable, no power to PLC, incorrect baud rate or rack settings for PLC configuration. COMM Status indicator is off.
Check for pulled cables and PLC power. Check baud rate settings and rack configurations.
Check wiring of connector.
No communication can occur because of an invalid rack configuration.
During startup, the terminal detected a missing, corrupt or nonfunctional remote I/O card. The terminal will run but not communicate.
Communication resumes when problem is corrected.
Correct the RIO rack configuration.
Contact technical support and provide specific message.
EtherNet/IP Messages
For a description of EtherNet/IP terminal codes, see page 263.
256 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
DH+ Terminal Messages
Error Number Terminal
Messages
675 or 684 Required network node(s) not found
Type
Comm Status
676 or 685
677 or 686
678 or 687
679 or 688
681 or 690
File access error
Unstable DH+ network
Comm Status
Duplicate node detected
Comm Status
No active Node(s) found on network
Comm Status
DH+ hardware failed
Comm Status
Comm Status
Meaning Recommended Action
The network is active, but the logic controller(s) are not located at the expected nodes.
Verify that the logic controller(s) required by the application are at the expected node addresses and that the communication parameters are set properly.
1. The data files do not exist on the controller. Create the data files.
1. The terminal is trying to access one or more controller data files that are unavailable.
2. If the message is flashing, the terminal is trying to read or write data files that are unavailable.
Corrupt data packets or intermittent system configuration was detected on DH+ network.
2. The data file is smaller than what is required. For example, the PanelView uses N7:10 but only N7:0 is defined in the controller.
Verify all controller addressing and baud rate settings. Check for loose or reversed wiring.
Verify all device nodes.
More than one node was assigned the same address.
No other DH+ devices can be located on the network.
Verify that PanelView terminal and logic controller(s) are correctly connected to the system. Check cable and wiring.
If error continues, verify that baud rates on the terminal and controller are the same. Communication resumes when the problem is corrected.
During startup, the terminal detected a missing, corrupt, or nonfunctional
DH+ card. The terminal will run but not communicate.
Contact technical support and provide the specific terminal message.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 257
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
DF1 Terminal Messages
Error Number Terminal
Messages
675 or 682
676 or 683
679 or 686
681 or 688
Required network node(s) not found
File access error Comm Status The terminal is trying to access one or more controller data files that are unavailable. If the message is flashing, the terminal is trying to read or write data files that are unavailable.
Panelview offline Comm Warning PanelView is offline.
DF1 hardware failed
Type
Comm Status
Comm Status
Meaning
The network is active, but the logic controller(s) are not located at the expected nodes.
During startup the terminal detected a missing, corrupt, or nonfunctional
DF1+ card. The terminal will run but not communicate.
Recommended Action
Verify that the logic controller(s) required by the application are at the expected node addresses and that the communication parameters are set properly.
The data files do not exist on the controller. Create the data files.
Check connections
Contact technical support and provide terminal message.
Terminal Codes
Terminal Codes are displayed on the PanelView terminal during operation or terminal configuration.
DeviceNet Codes
Comm Status codes appear as a banner at the top of an application screen or as a status indicator on the terminal’s Configuration screen.
Error 634 appears in upper left of banner. Codes less than 12 are minor faults and clear automatically when corrected. Codes above 12 require a terminal reset to clear.
258 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
4
5
10
11
12
13
DeviceNet Comm
Status Code
1
2
3
6
7
Indicates Recommended Action
No connections established. Occurs on power-up until a device connection is established on the network.
A connection is in the timed out state. Occurs when
I/O polling stops after an I/O poll connection is running.
Establish a connection over DeviceNet to the
PanelView.
Check that the network wiring and that the master device (scanner) is operational.
An peer tag cannot be obtained. Occurs if the device associated with a peer tag is not responding or the peer tag does not exist at the specified class, instance, and attribute number.
Ensure the data location is correct and that the end device is attached and operational. For write tags, ensure that the appropriate attribute is targeted. If the targeted device is UCMM capable, ensure it has enough explicit message connections to allow the
PanelView to take one. If the targeted device is not
UCMM capable, ensure that it is owned by a Master device (scanner).
A zero length I/O message was received placing the
I/O application in idle mode. Occurs when scanner is in program mode.
Message Overrun. Message traffic from the
PanelView is being generated quicker than it is possible to send the data. Occurs with large I/O sizes when Change-Of-State is being used and state changes are occurring very quickly or if polling too fast.
Offline Connection Set Identify Received. An Offline
Connection Set Point-to-Point Identify Message has been received. Occurs if a Client device on the network capable of executing the Offline Connection
Set sends a Point-to-Point Identify message to the terminal while it is in the Offline State. (It failed
Duplicate MAC ID Detection on startup).
Error clears when switched back to run. Correct the problem of the Master sending the I/O idle condition.
Slow down I/O polling or the state changes generating Change-of-State I/O messages. Use
Cyclic I/O at a fast heartbeat rate rather than
Change-of-State. Use the production inhibit capability on the master.
No action required. The error clears within 500 ms of the last Identify message sent.
A Listen Only connection has timed out. It has not received a message in at least four times the expected packet rate value. This occurs if the message associated with the Listen Only tag is not occurring or was not identified correctly.
Autobaud in Progress. Occurs on startup while the
Autobaud process is executing.
Check that the Listen Only tags are properly configured. Verify that the associated message is occurring at the expected packet rate. DeviceNet traffic monitor may be helpful.
No network power detected. Occurs if network 24V is not present.
Dup MAC Failure. Occurs if the PanelView powers up with the same Node Address present on the network.
Bus-off Interrupt occurred. CAN Chip is held in reset.
Caused by noise on network signal lines or an attempt to connect to the network at the wrong baud rate.
No action required. The error clears within 10 seconds, the maximum time allowed to detect a baud rate.
Check the wiring. This message will clear automatically when 24V power is restored.
Change the node address to an unused address and reset the terminal.
Check baud rate and network wiring, including termination resistors. Reset the terminal.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 259
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
Alert codes appear as a box in the middle of the screen. Error 636 appears in the upper left corner. Operation of the terminal continues.
Alert messages can be cleared.
DeviceNet Alert Codes Indicates
2 Unsupported DeviceNet Message received. The
Network Access Object received a message that is not supported.
3
4
7
Initial Writes Failure. The Motherboard failed to send all input data to the daughter card prior to network startup.
Invalid Peer Address. Occurs at runtime if the node address of a peer tag is the same as the PanelView.
Change-Of-State Input Overrun. Occurs if PanelView state changes on I/O input data occurs faster than the PanelView can send them to the I/O scanner.
Recommended Action
Should not occur in normal operation. Clear the message. If problem re-occurs, contact technical support.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Clear the message and determine which tag in the application is pointing to the PanelView’s node address. Correct the application and or the Indirect
Address tag, if used.
Clear the message. Excessive network traffic could cause this problem if inputs are changing rapidly.
8
10
12
An external network process has caused the reset of the network access process. Connections are temporarily lost. Occurs if an external device sends an Identify Object Reset Service to the terminal or if an external device changes the terminal’s node address (directly or using the Offline Connection
Set).
Unsupported DeviceNet message received.
No action required. Any server connections will need to be re-established.
Invalid ASA Number (0x00000000 or 0xFFFFFFFF).
Occurs if the flash memory is corrupt or an invalid
ASA number was programmed.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Clear the message. The message occurs each time the terminal is reset. The terminal operates normally but you should correct the problem. Contact technical support.
14
15
16
19
Get Next Scan Item Failed in peer mode.
Peer Input Data not received. Will occur if an input
(push button) changes a second time before its previous state was sent on the network. Only for
Peer tags.
I/O Connection Size does not match size of the data in I/O Assembly Instances (typically Instances 1 and
2). Programmed connection sizes for I/O do not match the amount of data represented by the I/O type tags.
Get Next Context Request Failure. In Peer Mode scanning, the request to obtain the next tag in current context failed.
Should not occur in normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Clear the message. Excessive network traffic could cause this problem if inputs are changing rapidly.
Handle high speed input data over I/O connections if possible.
Clear the message and if the problem reoccurs, consult technical support.
Should not occur in normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
260 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
DeviceNet Alert Codes Indicates
20
23
38
Autobaud Failure. The autobaud process failed to detect a valid baud rate within 10 seconds. Occurs if network traffic is nonexistent or intermittent.
Nonvolatile Objects have been reset. Nonvolatile storage of some objects required a full reset on powerup. Certain nonvolatile values will be reset to defaults.
An external client device on the network has performed a Set Attribute request on the Baud Rate setting. The baud may be different on next terminal reset.
Recommended Action
Start the terminal when network traffic exists or use a fixed baud rate.
Can occur when the daughtercard firmware in the terminal is upgraded. Clear the message and continue. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Confirm the Active Baud on the Communication
Setup screen of the terminal.
Fault codes appear as a full screen box with Error 635 appears in the upper left corner. Reset the terminal to clear the condition. If the problem reoccurs, note the 2-digit code and contact technical support.
DeviceNet Fault Codes Indicates
5
6
PCCC Message Transaction error during the transfer
Stack overflow fault
Recommended Action
Should not occur in normal operation. Clear the message. If problem re-occurs, contact technical support.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
13 Invalid Screen Context Priority Received
17
18
33
37
39
20xx
Client Object Failed
CAN Chip Failed to initialize
I/O Assembly Remap Error
The size of a particular channel exceeds the size limitation set by the daughtercard.
The application contains more Listen Only channels that the daughtercard supports.
Critical Internal DeviceNet firmware fault
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Revalidate the application and download. If problem re-occurs, contact technical support.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Reset the terminal. If problem re-occurs, contact technical support.
9, 11, 21, 22, 24-32, 34-36 Internal faults associated with motherboard/daughtercard communication
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Should not occur during normal operation. Clear the message. If problem reoccurs, contact technical support.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 261
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
General Codes
General
Terminal
Alert Code
603
9020
Alert Type
Critical fault
Critical fault
Indicates
File download error
An internal fault occurred.
Recommended Action
Reset the terminal. If problem occurs again, contact technical support.
Reset the terminal. If problem occurs again, contact technical support.
ControlNet
Error Codes
1803
1824
1826
1828
1829
3333
Error Type
Informational
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
ControlNet Codes
These errors appear at the top of the application screen or on the terminal’s configuration screen. If you should get an alert number that is not listed, contact technical support.
Indicates Recommended Action
The communication device has completed the request to force the device into the listen-only state.
The PanelView was forced to a listen-only state.
A fixed tag packet was received but there is no place to route the packet. The data packet is discarded and the error message is displayed.
The PanelView was detected as having a duplicate node address and is in the listen-only mode. Check the node address (MAC ID) of the devices on the network to verify that addresses are not duplicated.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
An attempt was made to open an unsupported transport class.
An attempt was made to open a
Class 1 transport with application triggering or a Class
3 transport with cyclic triggering.
A connection has timed out.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
A file transfer was unexpectedly interrupted. Try to transfer again.
262 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
9012
9014
9015
9016
9017
9018
9019
9020
ControlNet
Alert Codes
9000
9003
9004
9010
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
These messages appear on the terminal screen as DC Error=xx. If you get an alert number that is not listed here, contact technical support.
Alert Type
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Communication
Warning
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Critical fault
Indicates: Recommended Action
Interface startup failed.
CIP S/N is not valid.
Out of buffers.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Check node address of all devices on the network including the PanelView terminal.
Invalid target node, target node is the same as the PanelView, or larger than the UMAX.
ControlNet object received a reset request.
A fatal CPU fault occurred.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
A ControlNet hardware fault occurred.
RAM verification failed at startup.
Contact technical support.
CRC verification failed at startup.
Contact technical support.
A critical internal error occurred. Contact technical support.
An internal fault occurred.
Reset terminal, if problem occurs again, contact technical support.
An internal fault occurred.
Reset terminal. If problem occurs again, reload application. If problem persists, contact technical support.
EtherNet/IP Codes
These messages appear on the terminal screen as DC Error=xx. If you get an alert number that is not listed here, contact technical support.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 263
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
Error Number Terminal
Messages xx,xx,xx
Number depends on hardware fault detected.
Communication
Interface Fault
Type
Critical Fault
Meaning Recommended Action
A hardware problem was detected during power-up. If you ignore message and display the EtherNet/IP
Communication Screen, the Comm
Status displays “Comms hardware fault:” without an error number. The
FW revision, serial number and
EtherNet/IP address fields are displayed.
Contact technical support to have unit repaired.
Internal error occurred.
Internal error occurred.
Internal error occurred.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
770
771
Buffer overflow Comm Status
Buffer underflow Comm Status
1799 Heap Comm Status empty
16387 Comms not started yet...
Comm Status
16388
16389
16390
16391
16392
16393
16394
16397
The PanelView has not connected to the network.
DC incorrectly configured.
Check IP configuration (on the
Communication Setup screen) and wait for PanelView to connect to the network.
Contact technical support.
CIP S/N is not valid
Out of buffers
Critical fault.
An initial write failed
Critical fault.
No buffers are available for read or write operations.
Comm Warning Write to Logic Controller on Startup was configured and on powerup, the
PanelView could not write initial values to a node's data table address.
Contact technical support.
Check/define data table address in the controller.
or
Check communication connections and node configuration in the application.
Write to Logic Controller on Startup was not configured and the
PanelView was unable to write a controller. Note: The error is only displayed on the first write attempt.
PV write failed Comm Warning PanelView is communicating with the controller. The data table address does not exist.
Check/define data table address in the controller.
PV write timeout Comm Warning PanelView is not communicating with the logic controller.
PV read fail Comm Warning PanelView is communicating with the controller. The data table address does not exist.
Check connections and node configuration in the application.
Check/define data table address in the controller.
PV read timeout Comm Warning PanelView is not communicating with the controller.
Check/define data table address in the controller.
CN object received a reset request
Comm Warning An Ethernet object received a reset request from a device on the network.
The PanelView does not support network resets.
264 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
Error Number Terminal
Messages
16398 The Connection
Originator is indicating it is in
Program Mode
16399
16401
16402
A fatal CPU fault occurred
The RAM check failed
The CRC check of the firmware failed
16403
16404
16405
16406, 16407
Type
Critical Fault
Critical Fault
OS startup failed Critical Fault
PV Client Task
Fault
Critical Fault
Critical Fault Invalid preset information received from motherboard.
Connection with
Addr or scan rate invalid or no connection being attempted.
Critical Fault
Meaning
Comm Warning The logic controller is offline (in
Program Mode). The COMM Status indicator on the Configuration Mode menu is off.
Critical Fault A fatal CPU fault occurred.
RAM verification failed at startup.
CRC verification failed at startup.
Operating system failed to start.
Internal error has occurred.
Internal error has occurred.
Internal error has occurred.
16408 Internal error has occurred.
16409
16410
16411
16412
16413
16414
16415
16416
No buffers available for read operation
DC couldn’t send out the write request in time.
Critical Fault
Critical Fault
Critical Fault Too many clients attempted to connect to server
XS-WD creation error
XS-WD start error
ENet addr is not valid
Duplicate IP address detected
Critical Fault
Critical Fault
Communication
Warning
Critical Fault
Unknown error detected
Communication
Warning
No network link Critical Fault
Too many write operations are occurring.
Internal error has occurred.
Internal error has occurred.
Internal error has occurred.
The EtherNet address for a device on the EtherNet/IP network is invalid.
The PanelView has the same IP address as another device on the
EtherNet/IP network.
An operating system message has occurred.
Communication has not been established with network.
Recommended Action
Place the logic controller in run mode to resume communication.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Contact technical support.
Change the IP address of the
PanelView (on the Communication
Setup screen) so that is unique on the network.
Contact technical support.
Check Ethernet cable.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 265
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
Error Number Terminal
Messages
16417
16418
16420
DHCP/BootP
Enable failed
Invalid IP Address or Subnet Mask
Communication
Warning
Invalid Gateway
Address
Type
Communication
Warning
Communication
Warning
Meaning Recommended Action
The DHCP/BootP Enable server failed to allocate an IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to the
PanelView terminal
The IP address or the subnet mask of the PanelView terminal is not valid.
Check DHCP/BootP Enable server on your network.
Enter a valid IP address and/or the subnet mask of the PanelView terminal on the Communication Setup screen.
Important: The Gateway Address cannot be entered at the terminal; you must configure this address in the Communication Setup dialog of
PanelBuilder32.
The Gateway Address is not valid.
This error occurs if the downloaded application has DHCP/BootP enabled and it is then disabled at the terminal. On a restart, the terminal will not have the necessary information (IP Address, Subnet
Mask, Gateway Address) to connect to the network.
Change the Gateway Address in the
PanelBuilder32 software.
266 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers Appendix B
Remote I/O Communication
Loss
When communication fails on a remote I/O network:
•
Object states are maintained and the message No PLC
Communication is displayed on the screen.
•
If Block Transfers are defined for the application, but no BTR or
BTW instructions are received, another message appears when the Block Transfer Timeout occurs.
These messages continue to display until communication is established. If a write operation is attempted to the logic program controlling the PanelView objects, the terminal will display the message Error: Write to Logic Controller failed.
If a PanelView object is activated during a communication loss, the object retains its new state and sends this state value to the controller when communication is established.
Self-test Numbers
The self-test numbers appear on the screen during powerup.
COPYRIGHT ALLEN-BRADLEY COMPANY
1999, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED VXX.XX
TESTING VERIFICANADO PRUFEN
VERIFICATION AUTOTEST
2
Self-test Number
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
20
21
22
23
24
11
12
13
Test Number
1
2
10
Indicates
STATIC RAM test
Terminal searching for a file to download.
Erase boot flash area.
Copy boot code
Boot code copy successful
Boot code copy failed. Check for error after boot code is copied to the onboard flash EPROM.
Erase firmware from flash EPROM
Copy firmware to firmware flash memory
Firmware copy successful
Firmware copy failed
Performed CRC base firmware check
267
Appendix B Messages, Codes and Self-test Numbers
30
31
32
33
34
Test Number
25
26
Indicates
Firmware not compatible with boot code
Firmware not compatible with hardware
Watchdog test
Stuck key test
Real time clock test
LCD RAM failed
Performed CRC extended firmware check
TIP
You may not see all of these test numbers during a powerup.
If a test fails, the terminal displays:
ERROR! FEHLER! ERREUR! ERRORE!
The following test numbers appear only if a problem occurs.
Test Number
40
50
60
Indicates
No executable code to run after boot
Wrong memory card format
CPU could not execute code
The table below shows fault conditions that may occur during powerup.
Fault Indicator
Solid Red
Blinking Red
(6 times per second)
Blinking Red
(5 seconds on/5 seconds off)
Indicates
Static RAM Test failed. Contact technical support.
Checksum test on boot code failed. Contact technical support.
Boot code is incorrect for terminal type (touch screen or keypad). Contact technical support.
268 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Appendix
C
European Union Directive Compliance
If the PanelView Operator Terminals are installed within the European
Union or EEA regions and have the CE mark, the following regulations apply.
EMC and Low Voltage Directives
These apparatuses are tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), and amending directives
92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC; 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive, and amending directive 93/68/EEC using the following standards, in whole or in part:
300
Micro x
300
Emissions (Class A: Industrial)
EN50081-2:1993
Immunity (Industrial) EN61000-6-2:1999
Immunity (Industrial) EN50082-2:1995
(2)
Programmable Controllers Equipment
Requirements and Tests) EN61131 2:1995
Low Voltage Directive (Safety Sections of
EN61131-2) x
(1)
Meets standard as of April 2002.
(2)
This standard applies to products manufactured prior to April 2002.
x x x
(1) x
550 x x x x x
(1)
600 x x x x x
(1)
900M x x x x x
(1)
900C x x
(1) x x x
1000G x x x x x
(1)
1000C x x x x x
(1)
1400 x x x x x
(1)
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 269
Appendix C European Union Directive Compliance
Intended Use of Product
According to these Standards, the factor which determines, for EMC purposes, whether a product is deemed to be Industrial rather than
Residential, commercial or light industrial, is given in clause 1 of
EN50081-2 as follows:
Apparatus covered by this standard is not intended for connection to a public mains network supplied from a high- or medium-voltage transformer dedicated for the supply of an installation feeding a manufacturing or similar plant.
When installed in Europe, any other application is in contravention of
European Union Directives, and a breach of these laws.
The PanelView 900 color, the 1000 grayscale and the 1400 terminals are certified for direct connection to a low-voltage public mains supply or to a dedicated source, which is intended to interface to a low-voltage public mains supply.
Wiring Recommendations
To reduce electrical noise, connect the PanelView terminal to its own branch circuit. The input power source should be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker rated no more than 15 amps. Route incoming power to the PanelView terminal by a separate path from the communication cable.
Where power and communication lines must cross, they should cross at right angles. Communication lines can be installed in the same conduit as low-level dc I/O lines (less than 10 Volts).
Declarations of Conformity
Declarations of Conformity are available for each of the PanelView terminals at the website http://www.ab.com/support under Product
Certification.
270 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
European Union Directive Compliance Appendix C
Battery Replacement and Disposal
The terminal contains a lithium battery, which is intended to be replaced during the life of the product.
At the end of its life, the used battery should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste and recycled.
The Micro 300 terminal contains a lithium battery, which is permanently connected and should only be removed or replaced by trained professionals.
Please refer to the terminal installation instructions for procedures to remove the terminal battery.
PanelView Terminal
PanelView 300 Micro
PanelView 300 Keypad
PanelView 550
PanelView 550/600 Touch
PanelView 600
PanelView 1000
Publication
2711-IN008
2711-IN027
2711-IN009
2711-IN034
2711-IN010
2711-IN036
271
Appendix C European Union Directive Compliance
272 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Glossary adapter
ControlNet device that responds to scanner messages (also called slave device).
address
1) A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. 2) A character string that uniquely identifies the physical location of an input or output circuit.
application
In the context of PanelBuilder32 software, an application is a logical arrangement of screens that replace the functions of a control panel and consist of push buttons, data entry objects, control lists, and indicators. The application runs in a PanelView terminal.
application file
File containing configuration information for a PanelView terminal.
Files exist in either a PanelView (.PVA) or a PanelBuilder32 (.PBA) format. Files transferred to a terminal are in a .PVA format. Files within
PanelBuilder32 software are in a .PBA format.
ATA card
Advanced Technology Attachment (ATA), Intelligent Drive Electronics
(IDE), PC cards (formerly PCMCIA) combine the drive controller and memory storage device. ATA cards can be accessed with standard
Copy or Delete commands on a computer. The card looks like a hard drive. You can use the card on a variety of computers without any special setup.
baud
A unit of signaling speed equal to the number of discrete conditions or signal events per second. Where one bit is encoded on each signalling event, the number of baud is the same as the number of bit/s.
boot revision
Revision number of the terminal boot code.
bridge
Device that lets network data pass from one link to another link.
273
Glossary
274 controller
A unit, such as a programmable controller or relay panel, that controls machine or process elements.
cursor keys
Up, down, left, right arrows on the terminal keypad. These keys are used to move a selection cursor or the active object indicator bar.
DF1
Allen-Bradley communication protocol based on an ANSI X3.28-1976 specification.
download
See upload/download.
DH-485 link
Data Highway 485 link. An Allen-Bradley token-passing carrier-band link for a local area network.
DH+
™
link
Data Highway Plus link. An Allen-Bradley token-passing baseband link for a local area network.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) software allows for dynamic allocation of addressing information for new attached devices on a TCP/IP network.
Domain Name
Character string mapping the local domain to the IP address of the
DNS server. See DNS Server.
DNS Server
The domain name server (DNS) converts more convenient host names into IP addresses. The DNS server is identified by a 32-bit IP address.
EMI
Electromagnetic interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise impairs the performance of electronic equipment.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Glossary
EPROM
Erasable programmable read-only memory. A PROM that can be erased, usually with ultraviolet light, then re-programmed with electrical signals. As with all PROMs, it is nonvolatile random-access memory.
EEPROM (flash)
Electrically-erasable programmable read-only memory. A type of
PROM that can be erased and re-programmed by electrical signals. As with all PROMs, it is nonvolatile random-access memory. Used by the
PanelView terminals to store applications.
firmware
Logic stored in read-only memory.
function keys
Set of keys (labeled F1-F10, F1-F16 or F1-21) on the PanelView terminals used to initiate functions. The function keys are user-defined and may have custom labels.
gateway address
A unique 32-bit address of the gateway connecting two individual IP networks into a system of networks. When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network, the gateway transfers the data between the two networks. The IP address is formatted as four sets of decimal numbers (0…255) with periods between them
(130.200.25.30).
interscan delay
Determines the amount of time the PanelView terminal waits before re-reading the current screen data from the logic controller.
IP address
A unique 32-bit address of a node on the EtherNet/IP network. keeper
The network controller of a ControlNet network.
275
Glossary
276 keypad
Set of 14 keys (numeric 0-9, decimal point, backspace, minus, and enter) to the right of the display on keypad terminals. These keys are used to enter data.
LED
Light-emitting diode. See status indicator.
Memory Card
A storage medium that can store a PanelView application and/or a font file.
MicroLogix
An Allen-Bradley programmable controller.
NEMA standards
Consensus standards in the United States for electrical equipment approved by the members of the National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA).
network
Collection of connected nodes including the connection paths, repeaters, and bridges.
network access point (NAP)
Port providing temporary access to a ControlNet network through the
RJ-45 connector.
network update time (NUT)
The ControlNet network update time established for the communication link.
node
The connection point at which medium access is provided.
PanelBuilder32 software
A Windows program used to develop applications that run in
PanelView terminals.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Glossary
PanelView terminal
An Allen-Bradley keypad or touch screen terminal providing the operator interface to the logic controller when an application is executing.
PC
1) Personal Computer. 2) Programmable Controller. 3) Printed Circuit.
PCCC
Acronym for Programmable Controller Communication Commands.
PGM (Program)
PGM setting means the baud rate is set via an explicit message request over the network by another device (typically a configuration tool, such as a PC or DeviceView). This baud rate setting is retained by the daughtercard when the power is cycled on the PanelView terminal.
PLC controller
1) An Allen-Bradley programmable controller with a name that has the prefix PLC. See programmable controller.
preset value
A value loaded into a controller data table when an application is first started.
programmable controller
A solid-state control system that has a user-programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I/O control, logic, timing, counting, report generation, communication, arithmetic, and data file manipulation. A controller consists of a central processor, input/output interface, and memory. A controller is designed as an industrial control system.
real time clock
Internal clock that provides time, day, month and year.
remote I/O
1) I/O connected to a processor across a serial link. With a serial link, remote I/O can be located long distances from the processor.
277
Glossary
278 remote I/O link
A serial link for carrying I/O data between a PLC or SLC processor/scanner and remote I/O adapters.
repeater
Two-port component that receives and transmits all data from one segment to another.
restore
To load an application from a memory (PC) card.
RS-232
An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits in a point-to-point link.
RS-485
An EIA standard that specifies electrical characteristics of balanced-voltage digital interface circuits in a multi-point link.
scheduled messages
Messages that occur at a regular specified interval. They are assigned a particular portion of the network update time (NUT) and are always transmitted at that time.
safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
A voltage that, under all operating conditions does not exceed 42.4 V peak or dc between conductors, or between any conductor and earth, in a circuit that is isolated from the main power supply by means of a safety isolating transformer or an equivalent means. National regulations have to be considered for a correct isolation voltage rating.
scratchpad
A window that appears in the center of the terminal display that allows data entry by using the terminal or screen keypad.
screen
1) the viewing surface on which data is displayed. 2) The visual image on a screen.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Glossary
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 segment
Trunk-cable sections connected through taps with terminators at each end and no repeaters.
SLC
An Allen-Bradley programmable controller with a name that has the prefix SLC.
SMAX
Highest ControlNet node address that can communicate during the scheduled portion of the network update interval.
status indicator
An LED that indicates Comm or Fault status.
subnet mask
A 32-bit value forming the PanelView terminal’s subnet mask. This parameter interprets IP addresses when the EtherNet/IP network is divided into multiple networks. The IP address is formatted as four sets of decimal numbers (0…255) with periods between them
(130.200.25.30).
tap
Hardware component that connects devices to the ControlNet trunk cable.
touch cell
1 of 128 or 384 rectangular areas on the terminal display that can sense when touched.
touch screen
The display window of the terminal that responds when touched.
trunk cable
Bus or central part of a cable system.
unscheduled messages
Messages that are sent on an as needed basis. Unscheduled messages are sent during the unscheduled portion of the network update interval.
279
Glossary
UMAX
Highest ControlNet node address that can communicate during the unscheduled portion of the network update interval.
upload/download
Commonly referred to the reading/writing across a link relatively large blocks of data from one device to another. Whether it is considered an upload or download may depend upon whether it is a read or write and upon which device initiates the transaction. When data is transferred to a programming device, it is considered an upload.
When data is transferred from a programming device, it is considered a download.
280 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Index
A
ac power connecting
electrical ratings
accessories antiglare overlay
backlight lamp
cables
file transfer utility
function key legend kits
memory card retainer
memory cards
mounting clips
mounting studs
real time clock
wallmount power supply
alarms content
description
antiglare overlay
application files running
settings
ASCII entry controls description
entering data
scratchpad in other languages
scratchpads
audience
B
backlight lamps
replacing
bar graphs
boot code revision
C
cables application file upload/download direct
DeviceNet
DH+
DH-485
Ethernet
remote I/O
RS-232
runtime communication cables to network interface module
runtime communication cables to processor
card, memory
certifications
cleaning, display window
Comm status indicator
communication ports
configuration mode menu
accessing
operations list
configuration screens
DF1
DH+
DH-485
EtherNet/IP
language selection
memory card transfers
preset operations
printer setup
remote I/O
screen setup
terminal information
time and date
control lists
activating
active item
active list
cursor
list keys
piloted
selecting an item
vertical indicator bar
ControlNet communication active node
available terminals
channel status
communication status
compatible controllers
connecting a printer
ControlNet ports
ControlNet protocol
firmware revision
related information
serial number
typical network
D
data entry
ASCII entry cursor point
ASCII entry keypad enable button
ASCII scratchpad
keypad enable button
numeric entry cursor point
numeric scratchpad
date and time setup
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 281
Index
282 dc power connecting
-??
electrical ratings
declarations of conformity
DeviceNet communication active baud rate
active node
available terminals
connecting a computer
connecting a printer
DeviceNet ports
input size
making connections
output size
status indicators
DF1 communication available terminals
baud rate
Comm status indicator
compatible controllers
configuration screen
connecting to a CompactLogix
connecting to a DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP network
connecting to a FlexLogix
connecting to a MicroLogix 1000
connecting to an SLC or PLC
DF1 port pinouts
DF1 ports
error detection (CRC or BCC)
handshaking
null modem cable
serial communication parameters
using a modem
DH+ communication available terminals
cable
configuration screen
connecting a computer
connecting a printer
DH+ communication port
making DH+ connections
RS-232 port
status indicators
typical system configuration
DH-485 communication available terminals
cables
configuration screen
connecting a computer
connecting a printer
DH-485 communication port
DH-485 programming connector
DH-485 communications hand-held terminal connection
LED indicators
link coupler
MicroLogix connection
network connection
ports
power supply
RS-232 port
SLC connection
SLC connection using AIC+
display adjusting settings
cleaning window
color
grayscale
monochrome
E
EtherNet/IP communication available terminals
-
cable
compatible controllers
configuration screen
DHCP/BootP Enable
interscan delay
IP address
network configuration
RJ45 Ethernet connector
terminal ports
European Union Directive Compliance
fault messages
fault status indicator
file transfer utility
firmware revision
font files
function key legend kits
I
F
indicators bar graphs
list indicators
multistate indicators
initial screen
installation of terminals
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
Index installing the PanelView 1000 clearances
cutout dimensions
enclosures
mounting dimensions
panel installation
required tools
installing the PanelView 1400 clip mounting
cutout dimensions
enclosures
mounting dimensions
required tools
stud mounting
installing the PanelView 300 clearances
cutout dimensions
enclosures
mounting dimensions
panel installation
required tools
installing the PanelView 300 Micro clearances
cutout dimensions
enclosures
hazardous locations
mounting dimensions
panel installation
required tools
installing the PanelView 550 clearances
cutout dimensions
enclosures
hazardous locations
mounting dimensions
panel installation
required tools
installing the PanelView 600 clearances
cutout dimensions
enclosures
hazardous locations
mounting dimensions
panel installation
required tools
installing the PanelView 900 clearances
cutout dimensions
enclosures
mounting dimensions
panel installation
required tools
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
K
keypad enable button
keypad terminals available options
operation
L
language selection
types
link coupler
list indicators
list keys control lists
screen selector lists
M
memory card
installation
loading application from card
loading application onto card
removing
storing font files
types
using retainer
write protection
message displays
messages fault
general
reminder
remote I/O
status
warning
mounting clips
mounting studs
multistate indicators
N
numeric data displays
numeric entry controls cursor point
description
entering data
keypad enable button
scratchpad
283
Index
284
P
PanelView 1000 connecting AC power
connecting dc power
features
installation
resetting
screen adjustments
screen saver
specifications
PanelView 1400 aligning the touch grid
connecting AC power
features
installation
resetting
screen adjustments
specifications
PanelView 300 connecting dc power
features
resetting
specifications
PanelView 300 Micro connecting to AIC+
connecting to DNI
connecting to MicroLogix
connecting to personal computer
connecting to SLC or ControlLogix
features
installation
resetting
screen adjustments
specifications
PanelView 550 connecting AC power
connecting dc power
features
installation
resetting
screen adjustments
specifications
turning backlight on and off
,
,
PanelView 600 connecting AC power
connecting dc power
features
installation
resetting
screen adjustments
screen saver
specifications
PanelView 900 connecting AC power
features
installation
resetting
screen adjustments
screen saver
specifications
PanelView terminals operation
types
pass-through
personal computer interface converter
connecting earth ground
PIC converter
power connection ac power
dc power
power supply
powerup sequence
DH-485 terminals
remote I/O terminals
RS-232 terminals
preset operations initial values
last state values
powerup screen
preset values
restart and load values
printer port setup configuring
handshaking
port pinout
printing
push buttons hold time
operation
R
real time clock
replacement
reminder messages
remote I/O communication available terminals
-
baud rate
block transfer timeout
cable
configuration screen
connecting a computer
connecting a printer
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
connecting to a remote I/O scanner
last chassis
out-of-box application
pass-through
,
rack number
rack size
remote I/O port
RS-232 port
starting module group
supported controllers
resetting
PanelView 1000
PanelView 1400
PanelView 300
PanelView 300 Micro
PanelView 550
PanelView 600
PanelView 900
RS-232 (DH-485) communication available terminals
CompactLogix connection
connecting a computer
connecting a printer
connecting to DH+ link
RS-232 port
SLC connection
RS-232 serial port cables
configuring
connecting a computer
connecting a printer
port pinout
S
scale, bar graph
scratchpad
ASCII entry
screen saver
screen selectors activating a list
description
list keys
selecting an item
vertical indicator bar
self-test numbers
specifications
PanelView 1000
PanelView 1400
PanelView 300
PanelView 300 Micro
PanelView 550
PanelView 600
PanelView 900
status indicator
Comm
fault
status messages
T
terminal codes
ControlLogix
ControlNet
DeviceNet
Ethernet
terminal information boot revision
current application
firmware revision
font file in use
hardware configuration
terminal messages
ControlNet
DF1
DH+
DH-585
remote I/O
terminals installation
,
types
terminology
time and date setup
touch screen terminals available options
troubleshooting correcting problems
problems
W
wallmount power supply
warning messages
write protection memory card
Index
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 285
Index
286 Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008
How Are We Doing?
Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the future.
Thank you for taking the time to provide us feedback.
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
Pub. Title/Type PanelView Standard Operator Terminals
Cat. No.
PV300 Micro, PV300,
PV550, PV600, PV900,
PV1000, PV1400
Pub. No.
2711-UM014G-EN-P Pub. Date September 2008 Part No.
PN 14527
Please complete the sections below. Where applicable, rank the feature (1=needs improvement, 2=satisfactory, and 3=outstanding).
Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you?
Completeness
(all necessary information is provided)
1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you?
procedure/step illustration example explanation guideline definition feature other
Technical Accuracy
(all provided information is correct)
1 2 3 Can we be more accurate?
text illustration
Clarity
(all provided information is easy to understand)
1 2 3 How can we make things clearer?
Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form.
Your Name
Your Title/Function
Location/Phone
Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments?
___No, there is no need to contact me
___Yes, please call me
___Yes, please email me at _______________________
___Yes, please contact me via _____________________
Return this form to: Rockwell Automation Technical Communications, 1 Allen-Bradley Dr., Mayfield Hts., OH 44124-9705
Publication CIG-CO521D-EN-P- July 2007
Fax: 440-646-3525 Email: [email protected]
Other Comments
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
PLEASE FOLD HERE
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DR
MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
Rockwell Automation
Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At http://support.rockwellautomation.com, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer TechConnect support programs.
For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit http://support.rockwellautomation.com.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, please review the information that's contained in this manual. You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States
Outside United
States
1.440.646.3434
Monday – Friday, 8am – 5pm EST
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Outside United
States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process.
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Publication 2711-UM014G-EN-P - September 2008 292
Supersedes Publication 2711-UM014F-EN-P - August 2007
PN 14572
Copyright © 2008 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Advertisement
Key features
- Color and grayscale displays
- Touch screen or keypad operation
- Different communication ports
- Printer port support
- AC or DC power
- Stainless steel bezel